NEO PX750BT User manual

NEO
Hand-Held Computer
With Windows Mobile 6.1
Classic
(Model No. PX750)
User Manual
May 11, 2010
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
Part No. 8100202.A
This user manual supports Model Numbers:
- PX750BT
- PX750BT8
- FCC ID: GM3PX750BT and GM3PX750BT8
© Copyright 2010 by Psion Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9
http:\\www.psionteklogix.com
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc., is
issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except
for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or
sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc.
NEO™ is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc.
Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Psion Teklogix Inc. is under license.
All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders.
Return-To-Factory Warranty
Psion Teklogix Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of
twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of
Liability provided at www.psionteklogix.com/warranty. (If you are not already a member of
Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty, you will be asked to register. As a member of
Teknet, you will have access to helpful information about your Psion Teklogix products at
no charge to you.) In some regions, this warranty may exceed this period. Please contact
your local Psion Teklogix office for details. The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured
equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired
by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization.
See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details.
Important: Psion Teklogix warranties take effect on the date of shipment.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not
limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including
but not limited to typographical errors.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
NEO Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 NEO Hand-Helds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
2.1
Preparing NEO for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.1 The Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.2 Backup Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2
Switching NEO On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.2 Switching the Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3
2.4
Connecting NEO to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Wireless Networking – Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.4.2 Wi-Fi Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.4.2.2 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4.2.3 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.3.1 IP Address and Name Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.4 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.5
2.6
Checking The Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Data Transfer Between the PC & the Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.6.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.6.2 Using Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.7
2.8
2.9
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
The Getting Started Centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Resetting NEO Hand-Held. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.9.1 Performing a Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
i
Contents
2.9.2
Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6.1 OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Features of NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.3 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.4 Charging The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.4.1 Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.2 The Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4.3 48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.4 26-Key Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.4.1 Choosing a Single Alpha Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.4.2 Creating Uppercase Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.4.3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.1 Adjusting the Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.2 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5.3 Screen Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6.1 LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.6.2.1 Adjusting The Receiver Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.1 Storing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.10 The microSD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.10.1 Inserting The Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ii
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
4.1
Navigating in Windows Mobile 6.1 and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
4.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2
Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic Desktop – Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2.1 Windows Mobile 6.1 Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
4.2.3 Ownership Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
4.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.2.6.2 Adding Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.2.6.3 Using Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.3.1 Customising the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.3
4.4
Managing Files and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
4.4.1 Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.2 Renaming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.3 Copying a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.4 Deleting a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.5
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
4.5.1 Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Programs – Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4.10.1 Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Chapter 5: Programs
5.1
5.2
5.3
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
iii
Contents
5.3.1
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.4
5.5
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Office Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5.1 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5.1.1 Workbook Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.5.2 OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.5.3 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5.3.1 Data Entry Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.5.3.2 Sharing Documents with Your PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.5.4 PowerPoint Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
File Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Imager Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Internet Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.10.2 Using Internet Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.11.1 Creating a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.11.3 Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.11.4 Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.11.5 Synchronizing a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.12 Pictures & Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.12.1 Moving Photos to NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.12.2 Opening a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.12.3 Deleting a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.12.4 Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.12.5 Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.13 Internet Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.13.1 Browsing Web Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.14 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.14.1 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.14.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.14.3 Changing Synchronization Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
5.15 Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
5.15.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
5.15.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
iv
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
5.15.3 Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Task Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Windows Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Chapter 6: Settings
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
App Launch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
6.4.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
6.4.2 One Shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
6.4.3 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
6.4.4 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
6.4.5 Scancode Remapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
6.4.6 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
6.5
Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
6.5.1 Input Method Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
6.5.1.1 Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
6.5.2 Options – Additional Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
6.6
6.7
Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.7.1 Start Menu Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.8
6.9
Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Sound & Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
6.9.1 Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
6.9.2 Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
6.10 Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
6.10.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
6.10.2 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
System Tab Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
v
Contents
6.14.1 Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
6.14.2 External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
6.14.3 Intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
6.15 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
6.15.1 Choosing A Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
6.16 Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
6.17 Customer Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
6.18 Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
6.18.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
6.18.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
6.18.3 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Manage Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
6.22.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
6.22.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
6.23 Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
6.24 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
6.24.1 Main Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
6.24.2 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
6.25 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
6.25.1 Battery Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
6.25.2 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
6.25.3 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
6.25.4 Built-In Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
6.25.5 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
6.25.6 Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
6.25.6.1 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
6.26 Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
6.27 Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
6.28 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
6.29 Task Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
6.30 Teklogix Imagers Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
6.30.1 Imager Demo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
6.31 Teklogix Scanners Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
6.31.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
vi
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
6.31.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
6.31.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
6.31.2.2 Display Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
6.31.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.31.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
6.31.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
6.32 Total Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
6.32.1 Creating A Backup Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
6.32.2 Restoring A Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
6.32.3 Viewing a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
6.32.4 Deleting a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
6.33 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
6.33.1 Advanced Interface And Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
6.33.2 Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
6.33.3 Radio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
6.33.4 User System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
6.33.5 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
6.34
6.35
6.36
6.37
Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.37.1 Paired Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
6.37.2 Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
6.37.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
6.37.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
6.37.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
6.37.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
6.37.3 Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.37.4 Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
6.37.5 About Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
6.37.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
6.38 Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
6.38.1 Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
6.38.2 Call Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
6.39 Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
6.39.1 Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
6.39.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
6.40 Wireless Manager Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
6.40.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
vii
Contents
6.40.2
6.40.3
6.40.4
6.40.5
6.40.6
Setting Up A Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Network Adaptor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
VPN Connection Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Managing an Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
6.40.6.1 Editing a Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
6.40.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
6.40.7 Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
6.40.8 Proxy Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
6.40.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
6.41 Wireless Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
viii
7.1
Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
7.1.1 Attaching the Hand Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
7.1.2 Belt Clip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
7.1.3 The Expansion Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
7.1.4 The Pistol Grip With Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
7.2
7.3
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Adaptor/Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
7.3.1 RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
7.3.2 Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
7.4
Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
7.4.1 Installation – Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
7.4.2 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
7.4.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
7.5
Desktop Docking Station – PX3001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
7.5.1 Desktop Docking Station Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
7.5.2 Charging a Battery Installed in NEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
7.5.3 Charging a Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
7.5.4 Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
7.5.5 Docking Station Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7.5.6 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
7.5.7 Linking a NEO to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
7.5.8 Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
7.5.8.1 Network Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
7.5.9
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Troubleshooting USB Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PX3012. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
7.8.1 Quad Docking Station Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
7.8.2 Quad Docking Station Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
7.8.3 Inserting a NEO in the Quad Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
7.8.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
7.8.5 Battery Charging – LED Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
7.8.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
7.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
7.9.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
7.9.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
7.9.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Chapter 8: Specifications
8.1
NEO Hand-Held Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
8.1.1 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
8.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
8.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
8.1.4 Bar Code Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
8.2
NEO Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
8.2.1 802.11b/g Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
8.2.2 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
8.3
Scanner/Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
8.3.1 SE 955HP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
8.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
8.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
8.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
8.3.3 HHP 5000 Imager Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
8.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Appendix A: Pinouts
A.1
A.2
Docking Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Battery Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
ix
Contents
A.3
Expansion Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
x
Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
B.2.1 Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
B.2.2 Bar Code Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
B.2.3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
B.2.4 Image Capture Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
B.3.1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
B.3.2 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
B.3.3 Setting the Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
B.3.4 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
B.3.5 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
B.3.6 Modifying a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
B.3.7 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
B.4.1 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
B.4.2 Setting the Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
B.4.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.4.4 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.4.5 Modifying a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.4.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.4.7 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.4.8 Setting the Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.4.9 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.4.10 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
B.4.11 Modifying a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B.4.12 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B.4.13 Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B.4.16 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
B.5.1 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
B.5.2 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
B.5.3 Trioptic Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
B.5.4 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
B.5.5
B.5.6
B.5.7
B.5.8
B.5.9
B.5.10
B.5.11
B.5.12
B.5.13
B.5.14
B.5.15
B.5.16
B.5.17
B.5.18
B.5.19
B.5.20
B.5.21
B.5.22
B.5.23
B.5.24
B.5.25
B.5.26
B.5.27
B.5.28
B.5.29
B.5.30
B.5.31
B.5.32
B.5.33
B.5.34
B.5.35
B.5.36
B.5.37
B.5.38
B.5.39
B.5.40
B.5.41
EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
UPC-E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
2D PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
2D Micro PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Code 16K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Code 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
Codablock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
2D Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
2D QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
2D Maxicode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Postal: PostNET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Postal: Australian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Postal: Canadian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Postal: China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Postal: Kix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Postal: Korean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Postal: Royal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
VeriCode®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
xi
Contents
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
C.1
C.2
C.3
xii
Scanner Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
C.2.1 Options – Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
C.2.2 Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
C.2.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
C.2.5 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
C.2.6 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9
C.2.7 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.2.8 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.2.9 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.2.10 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.2.12 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.2.13 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.2.14 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.2.17 GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C.2.18 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C.2.19 PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C.2.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Decoded (ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C.3.1 Options – Decoded Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C.3.2 Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.3.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C.3.4 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
C.3.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C.3.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C.3.7 UPCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.8 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
C.3.10 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C.3.11 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C.3.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
C.3.13 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
C.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Contents
C.3.15
C.3.16
C.3.17
C.3.18
C.3.19
C.3.20
C.3.21
C.3.22
C.3.23
Matrix 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
TLC-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
xiii
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 NEO Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 NEO Hand-Helds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
About This Manual
1.1
About This Manual
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain NEO, a light-weight, versatile hand-held computer.
Chapter 1: Introduction
provides a basic overview of NEO.
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
describes the steps required to get the unit ready for operation.
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery. This chapter also
provides information about indicators, SD/MMC card installation and general maintenance.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
describes the Microsoft® Windows Mobile 6.1 Today screen and how to use it. This chapter
also outlines basics like moving around a window, displaying menus, and so on.
Chapter 5: Programs
provides a description of the Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic Programs options and how to use
them.
Chapter 6: Settings
provides details about Windows Mobile 6.1 Settings options and how to use them.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your hand-held.
Chapter 8: Specifications
details radio, hand-held computer, scanner, imager and battery specifications.
Appendix A: Pinouts
provides port pinouts.
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
describes the Teklogix Imagers applet and how to use it.
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
describes the bar codes supported by the scanners and imagers available for the hand-held.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
1.2
Text Conventions
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional
information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical
injury, equipment damage or data loss.
1.3
NEO Features
Important: For all safety, regulatory and warranty information, refer to the ‘NEO
Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide’, PN 8000175.
NEO is a ruggedized hand-held personal computer running the Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
operating system. This hand-held is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input
methodologies are supported by one of a variety of scanners and imagers available. Optimization for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral
options and carrying accessories.
The unique tilted screen design on this hand-held computer makes the display content
readily visible. This means that the operator can scan a bar code and view the results on the
display in one movement – no need to manually tilt the unit to view the results after each
scan. In addition, the tilted screen in conjunction with the protective rib at the base of the
keyboard allows the unit to be placed facedown safely with no danger of an accidental
key press.
Note: For a complete list of NEO specifications, refer to “NEO Hand-Held Specifications”
on page 229.
4
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Helds
1.3.1
NEO Hand-Helds
Figure 1.1 NEO Hand-Held Computer - Numeric & Alpha-Numeric
Model Variants
Connected NEO Standard Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.7 inch Colour Touchscreen
Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
microSD slot
3300 mAh Battery
Discrete VoIP (Push-To-Talk)
WiFi and Bluetooth Radios
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Helds
Additional Connected Options:
•
•
•
•
1D Imager
1D Laser Scanner
2D Imager
Keyboard Variants: 48-Key Alpha-Numeric or 26-Key Numeric
Batch NEO Standard Features:
•
•
•
•
2.7 inch Colour Touchscreen
Windows® Mobile 6.1 Classic
microSD Slot
3300 mAh Battery
Additional Batch Options:
•
•
•
•
•
Bluetooth Radio
Bluetooth Radio and 1D Imager
Bluetooth Radio and 1D Laser Scanner
Bluetooth Radio and 2D Imager
Keyboard Variants: 48-Key Alpha-Numeric or 26-Key Numeric
Platform
•
•
PXA270M @ 624 MHz, 32 bit RISC CPU
128 MB Flash ROM, 128 MB RAM
Operating System
•
Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Wireless Communications
•
•
On-board IEEE 802.11b/g (CCX Certified)
On-board Bluetooth radio (10 metre range)
Application Software
•
•
•
•
•
6
Internet Explorer® 6
Office Mobile
ActiveSync
Open TekTerm
ANSI
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Helds
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TESS terminal emulations
IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392
MCC
Naurtech
Stay-Linked
PTX Connect
MCL
Bar Code Applications
•
•
•
1D Standard Laser Scanner Option – SE955
1D Standard Imager Option – EV15
2D Imager Option – HHP 5000
Internal Expansion Slots
•
One microSD slot
Expansion Port
•
•
•
Battery Output Power
USB Signalling
Scanner Trigger Input
Docking Port
•
•
•
RS-232
USB
DC Input
Power Management
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.7 V @ 3300 mAh lithium-ion rechargeable battery
10 hour battery operation at 5 scans, transmit and receive per minute
Built-in gas gauge and performance monitor
System backup (up to 10 minutes) during battery swap
3 day real time clock backup
Adjustable battery allocation between system backup and runtime
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
7
Chapter 1: Introduction
NEO Hand-Helds
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
Desktop charger
Quad charger
Pistol grip
Holster
Hand Strap
Shoulder Strap
Additional miscellaneous adaptors and cables (a complete list of accessories is available
at www.psionteklogix.com)
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
2
BASIC CHECKOUT
2.1 Preparing NEO for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 The Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Switching NEO On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On
2.2.2 Switching the Unit Off (Suspend) . . . . . . . .
2.3 Connecting NEO to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
2.4 Wireless Networking – Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Status Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Wi-Fi Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes. . . . . . .
2.4.2.2 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.3 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network
2.4.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.1 IP Address and Name Servers. . .
2.4.4 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Checking The Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
20
2.6 Data Transfer Between the PC & the Hand-Held . . . . . .
2.6.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 Using Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center .
2.7 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
21
21
21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2.8 The Getting Started Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.9 Resetting NEO Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.9.1 Performing a Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.9.2 Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6.1 OS . . . . . . . . . . 23
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
9
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Preparing NEO for Operation
2.1
Preparing NEO for Operation
2.1.1
The Main Battery
NEO is powered with a high-capacity, lithium-ion battery pack – Model No. WA3006.
2.1.1.1 Charging the Main Battery
Warning: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines
in the ‘NEO Hand-Held Computer (Model No. PX750) Regulatory &
Warranty Guide’, PN 8000175.
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully
charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations along with a NEO internal charger. When using the internal charger, a suitable power
source is required. All chargers and docking stations are described in Chapter 7: “Peripheral
Devices & Accessories” beginning on page 203 for details.
Note: If you are powering up a new unit, a warning message may appear on the screen
indicating that the backup battery capacity is low. To recharge the internal battery,
you must fully charge NEO with the main battery installed in the unit.
2.1.2
Backup Power
A super capacitor provides a minimum of 10 minutes of suspend mode backup power to
NEO to protect data while you swap in a new battery; all unnecessary draws on power such
as the display and CPU are shut down to preserve power.
Important: When you initially power up the hand-held, leave the battery in the unit for a
minimum of 2 minutes to allow the super capacitor to reach full capacity.
2.2
Switching NEO On and Off
2.2.1
Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On
Important: Before opening the battery cover on your hand-held, press [FN/BLUE]
[ENTER] to turn off the hand-held.
•
Push in the release latch at the base of the battery cover to unlatch it. Remove the
battery cover.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
11
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Switching the Unit Off (Suspend)
•
•
Insert a charged battery into the unit, making certain that the connectors on the battery
are aligned with those in the NEO battery compartment.
Replace the battery cover, and snap it into place.
Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an
uncharged battery, dock the unit and switch it on.
To switch NEO on:
• Press and hold down the [ENTER] key for at least one second.
• When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER] button.
The desktop screen is displayed.
Note: If the unit was already in use – the unit may be off (suspend state) – pressing
[ENTER] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working
prior to the suspend state is displayed.
2.2.2
Switching the Unit Off (Suspend)
•
2.3
Press the [FN/BLUE] key, and then press the [ENTER] key.
Connecting NEO to a PC
Note: Refer to “Linking a NEO to a PC” on page 220 for more details about the desktop
docking station and how to link to a PC.
NEO can be connected to a PC using the desktop docking station.
•
•
2.4
Insert the unit in the desktop docking station.
Use a Client USB connector to complete the communication link between the hand-held
and the PC.
Wireless Networking – Wi-Fi Config
NEO contains an integrated 802.11b/g radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used
to configure NEO for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options.
Note: In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator.
12
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Status Tab
To launch the Wi-Fi Config application:
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config.
The Wi-Fi Config screen is displayed.
2.4.1
Status Tab
The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which NEO is configured
to connect. When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.
Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
13
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
2.4.2
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
•
To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab.
Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration.
Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration.
Edit: Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration.
Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration.
Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network
in the list, and tap on Add New to activate the network.
There are two methods available when configuring a radio network – you can either scan for
an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of
networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and
tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security
capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional information, depending
on your network requirements.
If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a
network manually.
Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind
that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own
network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described
here.
14
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
•
Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network.
2.4.2.1 Authentication Modes
NEO supports four classes of authentication – Open, WEP, WPA PSK and 802.1x with EAP.
Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your authentication options.
Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields
appropriate to the authorization mode you’ve chosen.
Open Authentication
Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, NEO will
connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
15
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If
you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication – Open or Shared,
the WEP security key length – 64 bit or 128 bit and the key type – ASCII or Hex. WEP Key
fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an
equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the
access point.
802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise And CCKM
These authentication modes use 802.1X and with EAP authentication. When 802.1X is selected, NEO uses WEP encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the
others, the user may choose TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES encryption.
WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key)
When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK – a shared key
must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption dropdown menu: TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES.
2.4.2.2 EAP
This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for
802.1x authentication to an access point.
The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config:
•
16
FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to
protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the
use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
•
•
•
•
LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP
does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active
Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to
off-line dictionary attacks.
PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to
encrypt EAP traffic. MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is
appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains.
PEAPv1-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes
one time passwords (OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as
SecureID.
TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication.
Server Certificate Verification
When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, NEO will verify the certificate provided
by the authentication server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on NEO for the verification.
2.4.2.3 Encryption
The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to
protect transmitted data. Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the
dropdown menu. Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth.
Mode you’ve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available
at all.
•
Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen. If you’re uncertain about some of
the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information
for your wireless network.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
17
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Wi-Fi Configuration Tab
•
Once you’ve completed the necessary fields, tap on OK.
2.4.2.4 Connecting the Wireless Network
Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates
that this is the network to which NEO will connect.
• Tap on the Connect button to activate your network.
The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11b/g
radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is
populated with the appropriate information about your network.
18
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring TCP/IP
2.4.3
Configuring TCP/IP
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.
2.4.3.1 IP Address and Name Servers
To assign an IP address for NEO:
• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Wireless Manager icon.
• In the Wireless Manager dialog box, tap on the Settings button.
In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box:
• Tap on Marvell SDIO8686 Wireless Card in the adaptor list.
The Marvell SDIO8686 Wireless Card dialog box offering two options: a server-assigned IP
address or a user-assigned IP address.
If you want an address assigned automatically:
• Tap on Use server-assigned IP address to have an address assigned automatically, or
If you want to define your own IP address:
•
•
Tap on Use specific IP address.
Type the preferred IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway
Name Servers
If you tap on the Name Servers tab, you can statically configure the DNS servers; however,
if you use DHCP for IP address assignment, DNS is usually supplied by the same server that
supplied the IP addresses.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
19
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Advanced Tab
2.4.4
Advanced Tab
If you prefer to use Wireless Zero Config, the Windows native supplicant, to configure the
radio:
•
Tap on the Advanced tab, and tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to add a check mark and activate this option.
Tap here to add a checkmark
to activate the Windows radio
configuration.
• Press [FN/BLUE][ENTER] to reset NEO.
• A dialog box lets you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on OK.
Once the reset is complete, the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on NEO.
The following radio and security options must be defined: SSID, Auth Type, EAP Type and
Encryption.
2.5
Checking The Scanner
If your hand-held is equipped with an internal scanner, you can test it to ensure that it is operating properly. Point the scanner window at a bar code that your scanner was designed to
decode. Press the [SCAN] key or the pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the
hand-held screen.
Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the Bar Codes screen.
Review Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings” for details about bar codes.
2.6
Data Transfer Between the PC & the Hand-Held
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in
your PC. Microsoft® ActiveSync® is PC connectivity software that can be used to connect
20
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Using Microsoft ActiveSync®
your hand-held to PCs running this software. ActiveSync works only with the Windows XP
SP2 operating system or earlier.
If the Windows® Vista® operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your hand-held and your PC.
By connecting NEO to a PC with a cable, you can:
•
•
•
2.6.1
View NEO files from Windows Explorer.
Drag and drop files between NEO and the PC in the same way that you would between
PC drives.
Back up NEO files to the PC, then restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, if
needed, and so on.
Using Microsoft ActiveSync®
If you are using Windows XP or earlier, your data transfers require Active Sync®. To install
ActiveSync®, follow the step-by-step instructions provided at this website: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/help/synchronize/default.mspx
2.6.2
Using Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center
If you have Windows Vista or Windows 7, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync. Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center. Follow the instructions at
the following website: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/help/synchronize/default.mspx
To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
•
•
2.7
Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. NEO will be visible there.
Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen
Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 37 for details.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
21
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
The Getting Started Centre
2.8
The Getting Started Centre
The Getting Started centre outlines how to perform basic tasks when initially setting up
NEO. You can access the Getting Started centre from the Today screen, or you can tap on
Start>Programs, and then tap on the Getting Started icon.
Tapping on Getting Started displays a list of the basic setup option you may need to get
NEO ready for operation.
•
•
•
2.9
To get instructions about an operation, tap on an option in the Getting Started list.
Follow the instructions provided.
Where applicable, a link to an associated screen is provided.Tap on the link to display
the screen and complete your task.
To go back to the Getting Started menu, tap on the Back softkey in the taskbar at the
bottom of the screen.
Resetting NEO Hand-Held
There are two types of reset available: warm reset and cold reset.
2.9.1
Performing a Warm Reset
On NEOs running the Windows Mobile operating system, a warm reset completely reloads
and restarts the operating system. Registry settings, installed programs and any data files
that reside in flash memory are all preserved through the reset.
22
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6.1 OS
Files and data stored in the RAM Drive partition are not preserved during a reset. To protect
files stored in the RAM Drive through a reset procedure, you must create a Total Recall
profile (refer to “Total Recall” on page 162) and store it on the flash (“My Device”) file
system.
•
Press and hold down the [FN/BLUE] key and the [ENTER] key simultaneously for a
minimum of two seconds. When the screen goes blank, release the keys.
Note: You do not need to reset NEO after configuring the radio.
2.9.2
Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6.1 OS
A cold reset in Windows Mobile is almost identical to a warm reset, except that some lower
level hardware (PCon) is also reset before the operating system boots. For this reason, a cold
reset should only be used in rare, critical situations.
To perform a cold reset and launch the Windows Mobile 6.1 operating system (bypassing
the BooSt menu):
•
Press and hold down the [SCAN] [FN/BLUE] and [ENTER] keys simultaneously for a
minimum of two seconds.
After a cold reset, the BooSt menu appears, listing possible BooSt commands.
•
Type 1 to load the Windows Mobile 6.1 operating system.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual
23
3
GET TO KNOW NEO
3.1 Features of NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack
3.2.3 Battery Swap Time . . . . .
3.2.4 Charging The Battery. . . .
3.2.4.1 Charging Options .
3.3 Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
3.4 The Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Keys . . . . .
3.4.4 26-Key Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . .
3.4.4.1 Choosing a Single Alpha Character. . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4.2 Creating Uppercase Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4.3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters . . . . . . . . .
3.5 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Adjusting the Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Screen Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2.1 Adjusting The Receiver Volume . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
31
31
32
33
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
37
38
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
3.9 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
25
3.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Device . .
3.10 The microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Inserting The Card . . . . . .
3.11 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen .
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO . . . . . . . .
26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 42
. 45
. 45
. 47
. 47
. 47
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Features of NEO
3.1
Features of NEO
Figure 3.1 Front View
LED
(Light Emitting Diode)
Receiver
Microphone
Protective Rib
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
27
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The Batteries
Figure 3.2 Back View
Scanner/Imager
Pistol Grip
Attachment Slot
Pistol Grip
Attachment Slot
Accessory
Attachment Insert
Accessory
Attachment Insert
Docking Port
Beeper
Expansion Port
Cover
Battery Cover &
microSD Card
Compartment
BOTTOM OF NEO
Accessory Attachment
Point
Battery Latch
3.2
Accessory Attachment Point
BACK OF NEO
Battery Door Detection Magnet
(inside battery cover)
The Batteries
The hand-held operates with a lithium-ion battery pack – Model No. WA3006. Preparing the
unit for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in NEO.
3.2.1
Battery Safety
Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that
you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference
guide entitled ‘NEO Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide’,
PN 8000175.
28
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Removing the Battery Pack
3.2.2
Removing the Battery Pack
Important: To protect against data loss, NEO is equipped with a sensor; this sensor
detects when the battery door is opened and automatically places the handheld computer into suspend mode so that you can safely remove the battery.
Refer to “Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On” on page 11.
3.2.3
Battery Swap Time
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is 10 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced
within this time frame.
The Suspend Threshold feature allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the
hand-held will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the unit
will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period
of time. If you choose Maximum Back Time, the hand-held shuts off with more energy left in
the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
(Refer to “Suspend Threshold” on page 150 for details about reserving battery power for
data backup purposes.)
3.2.4
Charging The Battery
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. They must
be fully charged prior to use.
3.2.4.1 Charging Options
Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about charging options, refer to
Chapter 7: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories”.
Lithium-ion batteries must be charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a
variety of adaptors and docking stations. These include:
•
•
AC Wall Adaptor (Model No. PX3012) – operates as an AC power source and when
used in conjunction with PX3001 or PX3054, also charges the battery installed in
the unit.
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor (Model No. PX3056) – when used with a USB/DC Power
Adaptor (Model No. PX3054).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
29
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
•
Desktop Docking Station (Model No. PX3001) – operates as both a charger and a
docking station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the hand-held and a
spare battery can be charged simultaneously.
• Desktop Docking Station with Integrated V.92 Analog Modem (Model No. PX3008) –
integrates docking and analog modem functionality. Operating as a charger, both the
battery installed in the hand-held and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously.
Operating as a modem, this dock provides USB connectivity and data connections over
a PSTN line.
• Quad Docking Station (Model No. PX3004) – can charge the battery of up to four
NEOs inserted in the docking station.
The charge time required to make NEO ready for use varies depending on the type of
docking station used. A hand-held inserted in docking station requires 3 hours to charge the
battery to 75% capacity. NEO is equipped with an intelligent charging system that protects
the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at
maximum capacity.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on NEO in suspend mode. Additional
peripherals and other power consumption features will alter the specified charge
time.
Note: Refer to “Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time” on page 40 for additional information about the battery.
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, the charge process will not begin until the
battery temperature is between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
3.3
Switching the Hand-Held On and Off
Switching On NEO
• To switch the unit on, press and hold down the [ENTER] key for at least one second.
• When the LED flashes green, release the [ENTER] key.
The startup Today screen is displayed.
Note: If NEO is in suspend state, pressing [ENTER] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The
screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is
displayed.
30
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The Keyboards
Switching Off NEO (Suspend)
Important: Keep in mind that turning off NEO does not result in a complete reboot;
rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the unit is
turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
To switch off the unit:
•
3.4
Press [FN/BLUE] [ENTER].
The Keyboards
Two keyboard options are available:
• 48-key alpha-numeric keyboard.
• 26-key numeric keyboard.
These keyboard options are available for both variants of NEO – connected hand-helds
equipped with 802.11b/g radios and batch (unconnected) hand-helds not equipped with
802.11b/g radios.
Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or
key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.
The [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and
system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print on the
keyboard keys.
3.4.1
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] keys are modifier keys.
Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that
they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be
pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator
When a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in the
softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or not a modifier key is active. If the shift-state indicator icon is not visible (you can only see the soft
keyboard icon), you may need to take a few steps to display the shift-state indicator icon.
•
Tap on Start>Settings followed by the Buttons icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
31
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Modifier Keys
•
•
Tap on the One Shots tab at the bottom of the screen.
Tap in the check box next to Show modifier key state to display the shift-state indicator
icon.
Figure 3.3 Shift-State Indicator Icon
Shift-State Indicator Icon
replaces Soft Keyboard Icon.
Soft Keyboard Icon
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys
Note: The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that, for example,
pressing a modifier key once will lock the key ‘on’. Refer to “One Shots” on page 113
for details. Note too that by default, the [FN/ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’ when
pressed only once.
When a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock
or turn it off.
To help you identify when a modifier key is locked ‘on’, the key is represented in the shiftstate indicator icon with a black frame around it.
Figure 3.4 Shift-State Indicator Icon – Locked Modifier Key
Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the shift-state indicator icon.
32
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The Keys
3.4.2
The Keys
The [SHIFT] Key
The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the
symbols above the numeric keys. You can lock this key ‘on’ so that when you press an alpha
key, an upper case character is displayed. When you press a numeric key, the associated
symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen.
If you press the [SHIFT] key twice, it is locked ‘on’ essentially acting as a [CAPS] key, displaying uppercase characters. In this state, if you type a numeric key, the number rather than
the symbol above it is displayed. Press [SHIFT] again to turn the [CAPS] function off. Refer
to “One Shots” on page 113 if you need to adjust the behaviour of this key.
The Arrow Keys
The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down,
left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the
next character you type will appear.
The [<—/DEL] Key
This key allows access to both the backspace and the delete function. The backspace function represented by an arrow [<—] (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves
the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.
The delete function ([FN/BLUE] [<—/DEL]) erases the character at the cursor position.
The [CTRL] And [ALT] Key
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application-dependent.
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box or
activity and return to the previous one.
The Windows
[START] Key
This key displays the Start menu.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
33
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The Keys
The [SPACE] Key
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [SCAN] Key
All units are equipped with a yellow [SCAN] key. For units that do not have internal scanners, this key can be re-mapped to another function.
Volume Keys - [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW]
The volume keys are located on the [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW]. The [UP
ARROW] key – the increase volume key – is labelled with a plus symbol
. The
[DOWN ARROW] key – the decrease volume key – is labelled with a minus symbol
.
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [UP ARROW] and/or [DOWN ARROW] keys to
adjust the volume.
Backlight Keys - [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW]
The backlight keys are located on the [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] keys.
The [LEFT ARROW] key – the decrease backlight key – is labelled with a minus
symbol
. The [RIGHT ARROW] key – the increase backlight key – is labelled with a
plus symbol
.
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] keys to
adjust the backlight.
The Function Keys
The hand-held keyboard is equipped with a total of 10 function keys colour coded in blue
print on the numeric keys; these keys are accessed by executing a key combination,
[FN/BLUE] followed by the appropriate numeric key.
Note: The [TAB], [ALT], [CTRL] and [ESC] keys have [F1] through [F4] printed on
them; these are only labels and are provided so that the operator can create directpress function keys using the keyboard remapping feature. Refer to “Scancode
Remapping” on page 84 for details about mapping keys.
For example, to access function key [F7]:
•
•
34
Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [7] key—the numeric key to which function
key [F7] is mapped.
To access function key [F8], press [FN/BLUE] [8], and so on.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Keys
The Macro Keys
While macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 15 macro functions can
be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on
page 117 for details about mapping keys. Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 114 for
details about programming characters in a Macro key.
3.4.3
48-Key Alpha-Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Keys
The alpha and numeric keys on an alpha-numeric keyboard are directly accessible from the
keyboard – no key combination is required.
3.4.4
26-Key Numeric Keyboard – Accessing Alpha Keys
On numeric 26-key keyboards, numeric keys are directly accessible, and all alpha characters
are printed on the keys in orange characters. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character. To access an alpha character, first press the
[FN/ORANGE] key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you
want to type is printed.
3.4.4.1 Choosing a Single Alpha Character
The examples below illustrate how to access, A, B and C, all of which are printed in orange
characters above the numeric key [2].
Important: The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen.
To choose the letter a:
•
Press the [FN/ORANGE] key, and press the numeric key [2].
Note: To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key, you
may want to lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’. By default, the [FN/ORANGE] key is
locked ‘on’ when pressed once. However, depending on how your unit is set up in the
‘One Shots’ tab, you may find that you need to press the [FN/ORANGE] key twice to
lock it ‘on’. Refer to “One Shots” on page 113 for details.
To choose the second letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter b:
•
•
Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’. A shift-state indicator icon in the softkey bar represents the orange key with a black frame around it to indicate that this key is locked ‘on’.
Press numeric key [2] twice to display the letter b.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
35
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The Display
To choose the third letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter c:
•
•
Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’.
Press numeric key [2] three times to display the letter c.
Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout if you pause for one second between key presses
when selecting the second, third or fourth letters on a key. For example, suppose you
want to type the letter ‘c’ – you would need to press the [2] key three times. With the
[FN/ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause between key
presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically.
3.4.4.2 Creating Uppercase Letters
To display capital letters, you need to first lock the [SHIFT] key ‘on’.
• Lock the [SHIFT] key ‘on’.
All alpha keys are displayed in uppercase until you press the [SHIFT] key again to ‘unlock’
(switch off) the function of this key.
3.4.4.3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters
• Lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’.
Each time you press a numeric key from [2] through [9], an alpha character will be displayed on the screen. Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual indication
of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen.
Important: Once you have finished typing alpha characters, remember to turn off or
unlock the [FN/ORANGE] key. Check the shift-state indicator icon (refer
to Figure 3.3 on page 32) to make certain that the key is turned off.
3.5
The Display
NEO is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped.
3.5.1
Adjusting the Backlight
To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on,
you’ll need to choose the Backlight icon.
• Tap on Start>Settings and then, tap on System tab>Backlight icon.
Refer to “Backlight” on page 132 for details.
36
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen
Note: The backlight can also be adjusted directly from the keyboard. Refer to “Backlight
Keys - [LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW]” on page 34 for a description.
3.5.2
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen
If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer
is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon.
•
Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
37
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Screen Orientation
•
Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (calibrate) the screen.
Note: This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tapping on the
ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font
appearance. The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font
displayed on the screen.
3.5.3
Screen Orientation
In addition to screen calibration, the Screen icon allows you to determine how your screen
will be oriented – portrait or landscape (right- or left-handed).
•
•
•
3.6
Tap on Start>Settings>System.
Tap on the Screen icon.
In the General tab, tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use NEO.
Indicators
NEO uses an LED (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate
the various conditions of the hand-held, the batteries, the scans and so on.
3.6.1
LED Indicator
A tri-coloured LED – yellow, green or red – is located on the upper-left side of the unit,
above the screen.
Keep in mind that the application running on NEO can dictate how the LED operates.
Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour.
38
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Audio Indicators
The scanner also overrides LED behaviour. The table below describes what the various LED
colours indicator when a scan is activated – a scanner button is pressed or the scanner trigger
is pulled.
Table 3.1 NEO Scanner LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
Scan Status
Solid Red
Indicates the scanner is firing.
Blinking Red
Unsuccessful decode.
Solid Green
Successful decode.
Note: During the first two minutes of a battery charge, the LED remains solid yellow
while the hand-held computer status is assessed.
If the unit is attached to an external power supply, the hand-held LED reflects the battery
charge status.
Table 3.2 NEO Charge LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
3.6.2
Charge Status
Solid Yellow
Battery charged to less than 75% capacity.
Flashing Green
Battery charged to between 75% and 95% of capacity.
Solid Green
Fully charged.
Flashing Yellow
Temperature outside charge range (0°C to 45°C).
Solid Red
Battery is not charging. Battery fault warning.
Audio Indicators
The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard character
is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match
field or the battery is low. To specify how you want NEO to respond under various conditions, refer to “Sound & Notifications” on page 128.
3.6.2.1 Adjusting The Receiver Volume
The volume can be adjusted using the [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW]. The increase
volume key
is labelled with a plus symbol and the decrease volume key
is labelled with a minus symbol.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
39
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
•
•
3.7
Lock the [FN/BLUE] key ‘on’ and then, press [UP ARROW], the increase volume key
or [DOWN ARROW], the decrease volume key until the volume meets your
requirements.
When you’re done, you will need to unlock (turn ‘off’) the [FN/BLUE] key. Press
[FN/BLUE] again to unlock the key.
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
Note: When the main battery is at 50% capacity, a ‘low battery’ warning is displayed.
When the battery is at approximately 10% capacity, a ‘very low main battery’ notification bubble appears.
As lithium-ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity
remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the unit at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.
Lithium-ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and NEO battery system (including
chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance.
To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:
•
•
•
•
3.7.1
The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery. Try to keep its brightness as low
as possible.
The hand-held is ‘event’ driven—that is, when the unit is not in use, it reverts to sleep
mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key
press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers. Power consumption is reduced if you avoid
unnecessary events, and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible.
Tapping on the Power icon under Start>Settings>System tab displays a dialog box that
provides detailed information about the battery status of the main battery installed in
your unit.
When the hand-held is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless
the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week—for long-term storage, the battery
should be removed from the unit. Leaving the battery in a charger for extended periods
may shorten the overall life of the battery.
Storing Batteries
Long term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:
40
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
•
•
•
•
•
3.8
Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.
Lithium-ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batteries at temperatures between 0 °C and 20 °C (32 °F and 68 °F).
Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries can be
damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored
for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit.
To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60% every 4 or 6
months to prevent over-discharge damage.
A ‘never used’ lithium-ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or
no useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries as perishable goods.
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in
NEO before performing data uploads.
The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.
Note: Charging options are described beginning on page 215 for more details.
The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or
server. An optional 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection can be used via the USB to Ethernet
cable (Model No. PX3052).
Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP connections to a PC or server through a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection.
When NEO is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The unit also detects the presence of the Ethernet network.
3.9
Bluetooth Radio
Note: Integrated Bluetooth Class 2 radios are standard on ‘connected’ NEOs – that is,
units equipped with 802.11 radios. On ‘batch’ (unconnected) units, Bluetooth is an
optional feature.
The Bluetooth radio enables short range data communication between devices. In addition,
it provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exNEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
41
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Pairing a Bluetooth Device
changing information with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access. You can
also pair your hand-set with a Bluetooth headset. Refer to “The Bluetooth GPRS Phone” on
page 186 for setup details.
3.9.1
Pairing a Bluetooth Device
Note: Headset pairing information is also available in the Getting Started Centre in the
Today screen on NEO.
Turning the Bluetooth Radio On
Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with NEO, make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled; it is enabled by default. If, for some reason, it has been
disabled:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab and then, tap on the Power icon to display the
Power dialog box.
Tap on the Built-in Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth.
Next, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.
Tap on the Mode tab, and check Turn on Bluetooth. Tap OK.
Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of NEO.
If needed, set your Bluetooth device to visible (discoverable) so that the hand-held can
detect it and establish a connection.
Pairing a Device
To pair devices:
•
•
•
•
42
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
Choose the Devices tab, and tap on the Scan button to scan for devices in the area.
When the scan is complete, tap and hold the stylus on the device to which you want
to pair.
In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Pairing a Bluetooth Device
An Authentication dialog box is displayed.
•
•
If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
To proceed without authentication, tap on Next.
Note: If a remote device has authentication enabled and you’ve skipped the authentication
process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to
NEO. Tap on Yes and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on Done.
After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for
that device.
•
•
Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
Click on Done.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
43
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Pairing a Bluetooth Device
Note: If you choose a service requiring additional information, a dialog box is automatically displayed where further details can be completed.
The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiring additional information –
in this case, the Serial Port Service.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three different modes: Serial, ActiveSync and Scanner
•
•
•
Serial is used for simple serial port communication.
ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth.
Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar
code and NEO.
Once you’ve completed the information:
•
44
Tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
The microSD Card
The device you paired is listed in the Pair tab.
3.10
The microSD Card
A microSD card slot is available in the battery compartment. microSD cards provide additional, non-volatile memory to your hand-held.
3.10.1 Inserting The Card
•
•
•
Switch off NEO.
Remove the battery cover and the battery.
Gently slide the SD door down and then flip it forward.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
45
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
Inserting The Card
•
Slide the microSD card onto the guides on the SD door – position the card with the connector pads at the bottom so that when the door is closed, they make contact with the
connectors in the unit.
Connector Pads On
microSD Card
microSD Door
(opened)
•
46
Carefully flip the SD door down, and slide it upward to lock it in place. Do not force it.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 3: Get To Know NEO
General Maintenance
3.11
General Maintenance
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive
coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and
is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. NEO is equipped with a stylus that is designed
to safely select items on the touchscreen. Use only the stylus on the touchscreen; using
sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal
conductive coating.
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
•
•
•
•
sodium hydroxide,
concentrated caustic solutions,
benzyl alcohol, and
concentrated acids.
Note: An optional protective cover (PN 1081366) is available to help protect the touchscreen. Follow the installation instructions shipped with the cover.
3.11.2 Cleaning NEO
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent
to wipe the exterior of the unit clean.
•
•
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals. The plastic case is susceptible to
harsh chemicals; it is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic
slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the keyboard and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
When using a dampened cloth to clean NEO, make certain that the battery cover is in
place to protect the battery compartment from moisture.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
47
4
WORKING WITH WINDOWS MOBILE 6.1 CLASSIC
4.1 Navigating in Windows Mobile 6.1 and Applications .
4.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus .
4.2 Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic Desktop – Today Screen
4.2.1 Windows Mobile 6.1 Navigation Bar . . . .
4.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Ownership Information. . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . .
4.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments.
4.2.6.2 Adding Reminders . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6.3 Using Categories . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments . . . . . . .
4.3 Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Customising the Start Menu . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Managing Files and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Renaming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1 Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
51
51
52
53
55
56
56
59
59
60
61
62
63
63
64
65
65
65
65
66
66
67
4.7 Programs – Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.9 Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.10 Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.10.1 Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
49
4.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
50
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Navigating in Windows Mobile 6.1 and Applications
4.1
Navigating in Windows Mobile 6.1 and Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic for portable devices or desktop
Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. On NEO, this is accomplished
using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse.
4.1.1
Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus
Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need recalibration. Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 37.
NEO is equipped with a stylus—a pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to
select objects on the touchscreen.
•
4.2
Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applications and programs, make selections, and so on.
Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic Desktop – Today Screen
Units running Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic provide a Calendar option in the Softkey Bar;
phone options are not available with this version of Windows Mobile 6.1 operating system.
Connectivity Indicator
Start Button
Today’s Date
Volume Control
Battery Charge State
Navigation Bar
Clock
Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Getting Started Menu
Owner Information
E-mail Notification
Tasks To Complete
Calendar-Upcoming
Appointments
Softkey Bar
The Today screen displays all your important information – tasks, unread e-mails and
upcoming appointments – all in one place. The Start menu provides access to everything
else you’ll need.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
51
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Windows Mobile 6.1 Navigation Bar
4.2.1
Windows Mobile 6.1 Navigation Bar
The navigation bar along the top of the screen provides icons that, when tapped, open their
associated programs.
Hotkeys
Volume Control
Start Button
Connectivity
Battery Capacity
Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic Navigation Bar
Start Button
Tapping on the Start button displays the Start menu.
Connectivity
The Connectivity hotkey provides a shortcut to the Connections tab in the Settings window.
This tab provides access to Bluetooth, network, network card and internet connection
setups.
52
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
Volume Control
Tapping on this icon displays a sliding tab that allows you to adjust the speaker volume or
turn the speaker on and off.
Battery Capacity
Tapping on the Battery hotkey displays the Battery tab allowing you to view the remaining
battery capacity in the main battery.
4.2.2
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
This option displays the current date. If you need to adjust the date or set an alarm:
•
In the Today screen, tap on today’s date.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
53
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
The Clock & Alarms screen is displayed.
10
Time Tab
•
•
Tap on the Time Zone drop-down menu to set the GMT.
Next, tap in the Date and Time drop-down menus to set the current date and time.
Note: A checkmark next to Sync to current time zone automatically adjusts to the time
zone, and a checkmark next to Notify me when time is updated displays a notification message if the time is adjusted.
Alarms Tab
To set an alarm:
•
54
Tap on the Alarms tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Ownership Information
You can set a maximum of three alarms.
•
•
•
Tap in the checkbox to enable an alarm.
Tap the day on which you want the alarm to go off – Sunday through Saturday.
Tap on the time to display the clock.
Time Field
•
To set the time, in the time field below the clock, tap on the hour to highlight it, and
type the hour at which you want the alarm to ring. To set the minutes, highlight the minutes, and type the appropriate minutes, or
You can also assign the alarm activation time using the clock graphic. Position the stylus
on the hour hand of the clock, and drag it to the correct hour. Do the same for the
minute hand.
•
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Note: Tapping on the More tab displays a dialog box in which you can choose to Display
the clock on the title bar in all programs and/or to Sound alarms even when the
device is set to silent or vibrate.
4.2.3
Ownership Information
This option allows you to add your personal information to NEO. Some of this information
will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
55
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
E-mail Notification
•
Tap on Owner to display a screen in which you can type information.
•
Type your name, company name, address, telephone number and e-mail address.
Note: You can type information using hand-held keyboard, or you can tap on the soft keyboard icon in the bottom right corner of the softkey bar to display an onscreen
keyboard.
The Ownership screen has two additional tabs – Notes where you can add any pertinent, additional information and Options where you can specify whether you want the desktop to
display your ‘identification’ information or your ‘note’ information.
4.2.4
E-mail Notification
If you have any e-mail, it will be indicated in the Today desktop screen. To view your e-mail,
tap on the E-mail Notification option.
Refer to “Messaging” on page 98 for details about setting up your Inbox.
4.2.5
Task Notification
Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming projects,
and so on. If you’ve assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how many active tasks
you have.
Note: You can synchronize the Task Notification option using ActiveSync so that any tasks
are displayed on NEO as well as your PC. Refer to “Synchronization” on page 80 for
details.
56
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Task Notification
•
Tap on the Tasks option to display a list of tasks.
Creating a Task
•
•
•
Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task. The text is replaced with a blinking cursor. If you prefer to type the task using the soft keyboard, tap on the soft keyboard
icon in the softkey bar.
Type your task description.
Tap anywhere in the blank part of the screen, or press [ENTER] to add the task to
your list.
Editing a Task
•
Tap on a task in the task list to highlight it. Tap Edit in the softkey bar to display a
detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
57
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Task Notification
Figure 4.1 Task Details Screen
Each of the items in this screen, when tapped, displays a drop-down menu where you can
choose from a list of options.
•
Once you’ve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on OK to save your changes.
Note: You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task you
are defining.
Deleting a Task
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap on Delete Task.
Marking a Task as Completed
•
In the Tasks list, tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed.
Sorting Tasks
• Tap on the Menu option in the lower-right corner of the softkey bar, and tap on Sort By.
You can choose from Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date or Due Date. The tasks are arranged in the list according to the criterion you chose.
Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen
• Tap on Menu in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on Filter.
You can choose All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks or Completed
Tasks. The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose.
58
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
4.2.6
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the
weeks, months and years ahead.
Note: You can synchronize the Calendar using ActiveSync so that any meetings, appointments and so on are displayed on your Today screen as well as on your PC. Refer to
“Synchronization” on page 80 for details.
•
Tap on the Upcoming Appointments option in the Today screen, or tap on Start>Calendar to display the calendar.
You can also tap on Calendar in the softkey bar.
The default calendar displays an Agenda of appointments for the week, divided into days.
You can choose to leave the calendar as is, or you can tap on the Day softkey to reflect the
Week, Month or Year.
4.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments
•
In the Calendar screen, tap on Menu in the softkey bar, and then tap on
New Appointment.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
59
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
Figure 4.2 Appointment Detail Screen
•
•
In the Subject field, name the appointment.
Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.
Note: Refer to “Adding Reminders” for details. Refer to “Using Categories” on page 61
for information about this option.
•
Tap on OK to save your changes and close the screen.
4.2.6.2 Adding Reminders
•
In the Today screen, tap on the appointment for which you’d like a reminder. In the
next screen, tap on the appointment title. Finally, in the summary screen, tap on the
Menu softkey and then, choose the Edit command.
If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:
•
60
In the Reminder field, choose Remind me from the drop-down menu.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
•
•
•
In the second Reminder field, tap on the number in the field to display a drop-down
menu where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30. Tap on minute(s) to
display a drop-down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder –
minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).
Tap OK to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder.
Tap on the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen. The
reminder is indicated by the small, bell icon.
4.2.6.3 Using Categories
Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your handheld.
To assign an appointment to a category:
•
Tap on an appointment in the Today screen. In the Calendar screen, tap on the
appointment again.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
61
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
•
Tap the Categories field to display the Categories screen.
•
•
Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the appointment.
Tap OK. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.
Note: You can create a new category by tapping on New in the softkey bar at the bottom of
the screen.
4.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments
•
•
62
Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete.
Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop-up menu.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Start Menu
4.3
Start Menu
To display the Start menu:
•
Tap on the Start button in the upper-left corner of the Navigation Bar.
Start Button
Navigation Bar
Custom-chosen
programs
Most recently used
programs
Windows Mobile
command centre
•
4.3.1
Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work.
Customising the Start Menu
You can choose the items you want to appear in the Start menu – items you use most often.
•
Tap on Start>Settings.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
63
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Managing Files and Folders
4.4
•
In the Personal tab, tap on the Menus icon.
•
Tap the checkboxes next to the items you would like to appear in your Start menu.
When you’ve finished your selections, tap on OK.
Managing Files and Folders
Windows Mobile 6.1 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible with File
Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would
on any desktop PC.
•
Tap on Start>Programs>File Explorer.
Tap to display sorting options
Files stored
here automatically
Tap to move
back one level
64
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Tap to display additional
storage/files
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Creating a New Folder
4.4.1
Creating a New Folder
•
•
•
4.4.2
Renaming a File
•
•
4.4.3
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop-up menu.
Tap Rename. The file name is highlighted. Type a new name.
Copying a File
•
•
•
•
•
4.4.4
Tap Start>Programs>File Explorer.
Tap Menu>New Folder in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
Use NEO’s keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder.
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop-up menu.
Tap on Copy in the pop-up menu.
Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file.
Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen—away from other icons—until a
pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap on Paste to copy the file to the new location.
Deleting a File
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop-up menu is
displayed.
Tap Delete to remove the file.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
65
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Using Menus
4.5
Using Menus
In Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic, the menu is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Softkey Bar
Menu
To execute a command:
•
4.5.1
Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the command
you want to execute.
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access to a
group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar.
66
•
To display this menu, gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is
displayed on the screen followed by a pop-up menu.
•
Tap on the command you want to execute.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
The Softkey Bar
4.6
The Softkey Bar
NEO is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. It displays softkeys that
allow you to access menus and commands. It also displays the soft keyboard icon.
Soft keyboard
Soft keyboard icon
Softkey Bar
Softkeys
Softkey
Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey – for example, in the
sample screen above, the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word
Mobile. The View softkey lets you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed.
The Soft Keyboard
Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alternative to the hand-held keyboard.
Shift-State Indicator Icon
The softkey bar can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates active
modifier keys – [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN/ORANGE] and [FN/BLUE].
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
67
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
The Softkey Bar
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons>One Shots. Tap in the checkbox next to Show modifier key state, to replace the soft keyboard icon with the shift-state indicator icon.
Shift-state indicator icon
When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon. In the
example above, the [FN/ORANGE] key is active.
To distinguish a ‘locked’ modifier key – a key that has been locked ‘on’ – from a modifier
key that is only active until the next key is pressed, ‘locked’ keys are encircled in a black
frame in the shift-state indicator icon. Refer to “Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State
Indicator” on page 31 for details.
Note: You can still access the soft keyboard while the shift-state indicator icon is displayed.
Tapping on this icon displays the soft keyboard. Tapping on the shift-state indicator
icon again removes the soft keyboard.
68
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Programs – Using Applications
4.7
Programs – Using Applications
•
Tap Start>Programs to display the programs installed on NEO.
Opening an Application
•
Tap on an icon in this screen to launch the associated program.
Minimizing an Application
•
Tap on the X button in the upper-right corner of an application screen to minimize the
application. Note that sometimes, an [OK] button is displayed.
Note: Although it looks like the application is closed, it is only minimized. To close the
application, you’ll need to tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Task Manager icon.
Follow the steps in ‘Switching Between and Closing Applications’ below.
Switching Between and Closing Applications
The Task Manager lists all running tasks (applications).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
69
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Settings
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon – the
Task Manager screen is opened.
This applet provides a number of options to manage your opened applications.
•
End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list and tap on
the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
• End All Tasks: To shut down all applications, tap on the Menu softkey and choose
End All Tasks.
• Switch To: To make an application listed in this screen active, highlight the application
and tap on Menu>Switch To.
For additional information about this applet, refer to “Task Manager” on page 153.
4.8
Settings
•
70
Tap Start>Settings to display the setting options for your hand-held.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Help
Settings are divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections. Refer to Chapter 6:
“Settings” for details about the options available to you.
4.9
Help
Tapping on Start>Help displays a screen of help topics that are content-specific; if for example, the Today screen is displayed and you tap on Start>Help, the help screen will provide
topics about the Today screen. You can perform a help content search by tapping on the Contents or Search softkeys. Keep in mind that help is not always available.
4.10
Entering Text
Note: For additional information about tailoring text entry using the soft keyboard, the
transcriber, the block recognizer and the letter recognizer, refer to “Input” on
page 121.
You can enter text using either the soft keyboard or the hand-held unit keyboard. You can
also use the Transcriber to handwrite information directly on the touchscreen using your
stylus.
•
Open an existing document or create a new one – tap Start>Office Mobile>Word
Mobile, and tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new document.
If you’re using the hand-held keyboard to enter text, there are no special steps. Just begin
typing – the text, spaces, etc. will appear in the document.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
71
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Soft Keyboard
4.10.1 Soft Keyboard
The soft keyboard is laid out just like the keypad on a PC keyboard. By tapping the stylus on
letters and modifier keys like the [SHIFT] key, you can enter text in a document.
If the soft keyboard is not already displayed:
• Tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.
• Tap on the letters in the keyboard to enter text in your document.
To switch to a numeric keyboard:
•
•
Tap on the 123 key in the upper-left corner of the soft keyboard.
Tap on this key again to return to the standard keyboard.
4.10.2 The Transcriber
To access the Transcriber, with your document opened:
•
Tap on the arrow next to the soft keyboard icon, and choose Transcriber from the popup menu.
• Review the introductory screen. It provides some shortcut symbols you can draw on
your screen to work with the Transcriber.
• When you’ve finished reading the introductory screen, tap OK.
The Transcriber menu and icon bars are displayed at the bottom of the document.
72
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
Figure 4.3 Transcriber Screen
Transcriber icon
• Use your stylus to write a few words anywhere on the screen.
After a few seconds, your words are recognized (or not) and are transcribed into typed text.
Note: Character recognition is more successful if you write using large letters.
Editing Text within the Transcriber
With your document open, make certain that you are in transcriber mode – the Transcriber
icon should be displayed in the lower-right corner of the softkey bar.
• Double-tap to select a word or triple-tap to select a paragraph, or
Draw a line through the text you want to select and wait a few seconds until the Transcriber
highlights the text.
•
Once the text is highlighted, write the new text that is to replace the highlighted
information, or
Press and hold the stylus on the selected text to display a pop-up menu. Choose Cut,
Copy, Paste or Clear (delete).
Note: You can also use the softkey bar tools or the shortcuts listed in the introductory screen
to help you edit a document within the Transcriber.
4.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
While the Transcriber attempts to recognize natural handwriting and transcribe it, Block
Recognizer and Letter Recognizer attempt to teach you how to conform your handwriting to
what the hand-held can recognize.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
73
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
Block Recognizer
•
Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose Block
Recognizer.
Input Panel
Recognizer Icon Bar
Input Icon
There are two points to remember when using Block Recognizer. First, limit your writing to
the Block Recognizer input panel – do not write in the body of the document. Second, write
only uppercase letters with your stylus.
•
•
•
•
74
Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer
screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be
recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form
a recognizable letter.
In the Block Recognizer panel, write letters to the left (abc) and numbers to the right
(123) on the input panel. Remember to write using uppercase letters – they will be
printed on the screen as lowercase unless you follow the step below to create an uppercase letter.
To create an uppercase character, draw a line straight up the ‘abc’ panel.
Use the Recognizer Icon Bar to move around the screen, add spaces, special characters,
and so on.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
Letter Recognizer
•
Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose Letter
Recognizer.
Input Panel
Recognizer Icon Bar
Input Icon
There are two points to remember when using Letter Recognizer. First, limit your writing to
the Letter Recognizer Input Panel – do not write in the body of the document. Second,
write only lowercase letters with your stylus.
•
•
•
•
Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer
screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be
recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form
a recognizable letter.
To create an uppercase character, write a lowercase letter on the left side (ABC) of the
input panel.
To create a lowercase character, write a lowercase letter in the middle (abc) of the
input panel.
Write numbers on the right side (123) of the input panel.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
75
5
PROGRAMS
5.1 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.3 ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.3.1 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.4 Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5 Office Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.1 Workbook Components . . . . . .
5.5.2 OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3.1 Data Entry Modes . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3.2 Sharing Documents with Your PC
5.5.4 PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
80
80
81
82
86
87
87
87
88
5.7 File Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.8 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.9 Imager Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.10 Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection . . .
5.10.2 Using Internet Sharing . . . . . . . .
5.11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.1 Creating a Note . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
5.11.3 Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.4 Recording Notes. . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.5 Synchronizing a Note . . . . . . . . .
5.12 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.1 Moving Photos to NEO . . . . . . . .
5.12.2 Opening a Photo . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
89
89
90
91
91
92
93
93
95
95
95
96
77
5.12.3 Deleting a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.4 Editing a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.5 Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . .
5.13 Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13.1 Browsing Web Sites . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.1 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook . . .
5.14.3 Changing Synchronization Settings . . .
5.15 Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server. . . . .
5.15.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session
5.15.3 Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.16 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 96
. 96
. 96
. 97
. 97
. 98
. 98
. 99
100
101
101
101
101
102
5.17 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.18 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.19 Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.20 Windows Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.21 Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
78
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Programs
5.1
Programs
The Programs menu provides access to all the applications available on your hand-held.
• Tap on Start>Programs to display this screen.
Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.
Figure 5.1 Programs Tabs
5.2
Games
NEO is equipped with a few standard games – Bubble Breaker and Solitaire – should you
feel the need to pass the time.
5.3
ActiveSync®
For PCs using the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, ActiveSync® – Microsoft PC
connectivity software – can be used to connect NEO to PCs running this software. By connecting the hand-held to a PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync
on the PC, you can view NEO files, drag and drop files between the hand-held and the PC,
connect to the Internet, and so on.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
79
Chapter 5: Programs
Synchronization
If you need to install ActiveSync, go to the website below and navigate to the ActiveSync
download information: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/help/synchronize/default.mspx
5.3.1
Synchronization
For details about synchronizing your PC with your hand-held, visit the Internet site identified above.
5.4
Calculator
Tapping on Start>Programs>Calculator displays a standard calculator with regular
functions.
•
5.5
Use your stylus to tap on the calculator buttons.
Office Mobile
This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs: Excel Mobile, OneNote
Mobile, PowerPoint Mobile and Word Mobile. Keep in mind that if Office Mobile is listed
in your Start menu, this icon will not be displayed in the Programs window.
5.5.1
Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet program.
If you’re familiar with the Excel application on your PC, you’ll be able to navigate Excel
Mobile.
In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values, create formulas,
and so on, this program can also include graphics such as pie charts.
80
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto NEO and update
them while you’re away from your desk.
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Excel Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
Excel Mobile.
•
•
If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, you’ll need to create a new
workbook. To create a workbook:
In Excel Mobile, tap Menu>File>New.
5.5.1.1 Workbook Components
Columns
Address of selected
text
Entry bar
Cell
Rows
Status bar
Toolbar
Menu bar
Selected cell
Formula drop-down menu
Sheet1 drop-down menu
• If the toolbar is not visible, tap on View>Toolbar.
You can enter data, work with rows and columns and create formulas as you would when
working with Excel on your PC.
Using Excel Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display Excel Mobile help files:
•
•
Launch the Excel Mobile program.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
81
Chapter 5: Programs
OneNote Mobile
5.5.2
OneNote Mobile
You can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your
notes with a notebook section in the OneNote version on your PC. For example, you can:
•
•
Create short text notes and voice recordings on NEO to remind you about important
meetings, ideas, etc. and synchronize them with your notes.
Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to NEO where it will be
available to you wherever you and your hand-held go.
Important: Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 and the latest
version of ActiveSync installed on your PC before you can set up a partnership between NEO and your PC.
Setting Up a Partnership
• Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync on your PC.
• Connect NEO to your PC; you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection.
When a connection is established between NEO and your PC, ActiveSync displays a New
Partnership screen.
•
82
Choose Standard partnership, and tap on Next.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
OneNote Mobile
•
•
To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2007 on your PC,
tap Synchronize with this desktop computer, and then tap on Next.
Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between NEO and the PC. Now you’ll be able to
pass notes back and forth between your PC and hand-held.
Creating A Note
•
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile>OneNote
Mobile icon.
If this is not the case, tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile icon. Tap on the
OneNote Mobile icon.
•
Tap on New to create a note page. Begin typing.
•
When you complete your note, tap on Done.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
83
Chapter 5: Programs
OneNote Mobile
Note: Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing, add Formats (Bold,
Italic, Underline, Strikethrough), and include Lists (Numbered, Bulleted, Clear).
Using the OneNote Menu
Tapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile
applet.
Robot Production Meeting
•
•
•
84
Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy and Paste: These commands operate in the same way as they
do in any Windows Office application.
Format: Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your
note: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough and Clear All.
Insert Picture: Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures
folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
OneNote Mobile
•
Insert Recording: When you tap on this command, a recording panel is displayed.
Cancel
Save
Play
Stop
Record
Tap on the Record button to record your message.
Tap on Stop when you’ve completed your message.
Tap on Play to listen to your voice message.
To discard your message, tap on X – the Cancel button.
To save your message, tap on OK. An audio icon is displayed in your note. You can tap
on it to listen to your message.
Synchronizing NEO One Note With PC OneNote
•
Insert NEO in a docking station, and use either a USB cable or Bluetooth to connect
NEO to your PC.
When the connection is complete, take one of the following steps:
•
In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC, choose Sync.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
85
Chapter 5: Programs
Word Mobile
or
On NEO, tap on Start>ActiveSync, and then tap on Sync.
During synchronization, the notes you created on NEO are copied to a new Office OneNote
2007 notebook called OneNote Mobile on your PC. When synchronization is done, you can
drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC.
Note: If you prefer to synchronize NEO notes automatically, you can set up ActiveSync so
that synchronization is continuous or occurs on a schedule. In ActiveSync on your
PC, in the Tools menu, tap Options, and then tap on the Schedule tab.
5.5.3
Word Mobile
If you’ve used Microsoft Word on your Mac or PC, Word Mobile will be familiar to you.
Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory.
Note: Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting
features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on NEO.
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Word Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
Word Mobile.
If you’ve already create a Word Mobile document, it will be listed in the Word Mobile
window.
86
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
PowerPoint Mobile
•
Tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new Word document.
Using Word Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display Word Mobile help files:
•
•
Launch the Word Mobile program.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
5.5.3.1 Data Entry Modes
In addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer or Transcriber. Refer to “Entering Text” on page 71 for details.
You can also use NEO’s keyboard for data entry.
5.5.3.2 Sharing Documents with Your PC
Documents created on a PC are recognized by NEO. However, some formatting is lost when
a Word document is converted to a Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs when you
open a .doc file and change it on NEO.
Important: To avoid translation problems, you can work on copies of .doc files. In addition, keep in mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to
log onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services, and then you
can use any program on your PC, including Microsoft Word (rather than
Word Mobile). Refer to “Remote Desktop Mobile” on page 101 for details.
5.5.4
PowerPoint Mobile
PowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC. To
launch this program on your hand-held:
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>PowerPoint Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
PowerPoint Mobile.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
87
Chapter 5: Programs
Demo Scanner
Using PowerPoint Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display PowerPoint help files:
•
•
5.6
Launch the PowerPoint Mobile program as described above.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
Demo Scanner
If a scanner is installed in your unit, you can use the Demo Scanner applet to set up and test
your scanner.
• Tap on Start>Programs>Demo Scanner icon.
A Demo Scanner dialog box is displayed.
•
•
Tap on the Settings button to display the Scanner Settings dialog box. Use this dialog
box to tailor the scanner settings for your hand-held.
Tap on the Scan button to test the scanner.
Important: For details about the Scanner Settings, refer to Appendix C: “Bar Code
Settings”.
5.7
File Explorer
Windows Mobile 6.1 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible through
File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you
would on any desktop PC.
Important: Refer to “Managing Files and Folders” on page 64 for details about this
program.
88
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Getting Started
5.8
Getting Started
For information about the Getting Started applet, refer to “The Getting Started Centre” on
page 22.
5.9
Imager Demo
Note: This icon is only available when an HHP 5000 imager is installed in your unit.
To run a demonstration of the Teklogix Imager applet features:
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Imager icon.
Important: For details about this applet, refer to Appendix B: “Teklogix Imagers
Applet”.
5.10
Internet Sharing
This option allows you to use NEO to connect your PC to the Internet. Before you can use
Internet Sharing, you must make certain that you have established a data connection on
NEO.
5.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection
Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection.
You’ll need the following information before you begin:
From your cellular service provider: data connectivity information, access point name
and PAP/CHAP security settings.
From your Internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider: access point
name and password and any additional security information.
For a GPRS, 1xRTT or dialup connection:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
89
Chapter 5: Programs
Using Internet Sharing
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection.
Type a name for the connection, and choose Cellular Line (GPRS), or for 1xRTT connections, choose Cellular Line. Tap on Next.
Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider, and
tap Next.
Type the credentials supplied by your service provider, and tap Finish.
5.10.2 Using Internet Sharing
•
Make certain that your data connect is running, and that you can access the Internet
from NEO.
If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC, you will need to disable the ActiveSync
USB connection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
On your PC, open the ActiveSync window, and click on File>Connection Settings.
Disable Allow USB connection by clicking in the checkbox to the left of this option.
Connect NEO to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable.
On NEO, tap Start>Programs>Internet Sharing.
Choose the PC Connection type – USB or Bluetooth.
Choose the network connection that NEO should use to connect to the Internet.
Tap Connect. It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection. (If you are
prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Yes.)
If your are using a Bluetooth connection, execute the following steps on your PC:
•
•
•
90
Click Start>Control Panel>Network Connections.
Right-click on Bluetooth Network Connections, and click on View Bluetooth
Network Devices.
If NEO is listed as a Network Access Point, click Connect. If it is not listed, click
Create a new connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add NEO to the list.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Notes
5.11
Notes
The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly.
You can enter text using the soft keyboard, NEO’s keyboard, or you can write on the screen
using your stylus. You can also record a message.
Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.
•
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Notes to launch this application.
If a blank Note like the sample screen here is not displayed, tap on New in the
softkey bar.
5.11.1 Creating a Note
• Choose an entry mode for your note.
To enter text with the soft keyboard, Transcriber or the Block or Letter Recognizer, tap the
stylus on the arrow to the right on the soft keyboard icon
to choose your text
input method.
To use your stylus to handwrite on the screen, tap on the pen icon
.
Important: Refer to “Entering Text” on page 71 for text entry details.
•
•
Compose your note using the method you’ve chosen.
Tap on OK when you’re done.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
91
Chapter 5: Programs
Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you used the
keyboard – otherwise, it’s named Note1, Note2 and so on.
5.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
When you use the pen tool, you can write notes in your own handwriting and keep them as
is, if you like. You can also teach NEO to recognize your handwriting and convert it into
printed text.
To convert handwriting into text:
•
Tap on the pen tool
and compose a note using your stylus.
• Tap on Menu>Tools>Recognize.
The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.
Note: To convert only a specific portion of your handwritten note into printed type, tap the
stylus just before the first letter of the text, pause for a second, and then drag your
stylus across the text you want to select. Then, tap on Tools>Recognize to convert
only the highlighted text.
92
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Renaming a Note
Failed Conversions
The Recognize tool sometimes gets the conversion wrong. If some words are not
converted properly:
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the incorrectly converted word.
In the pop-up menu, choose Alternative to display a list of possible alternatives to the
incorrectly converted word. Your handwritten version is displayed along the top of
the menu.
Figure 5.2 Incorrect Conversions
•
•
Tap on the correct word in the list.
If the correct word is not listed, as is the case in the sample screen above, tap on the soft
keyboard icon
to display the soft keyboard, and type the correct word.
5.11.3 Renaming a Note
•
Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename.
In the pop-up menu, choose Rename/Move, or
Tap the file name to select it, and tap on Menu>Rename/Move.
•
In the Name field, type the new name, and tap OK.
5.11.4 Recording Notes
It’s sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you’ve
captured an idea before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:
•
Tap on New to open a fresh note.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
93
Chapter 5: Programs
Recording Notes
•
Tap on Menu>View Recording Toolbar.
Volume
Skip to end
Skip to beginning
Record
Stop
Play
Progress
Indicator
•
•
Tap on the Record button – a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record.
Begin speaking into the microphone on NEO, or move the hand-held to within a few
feet of the source of the sound you want to record.
• Tap on the Stop button when you’ve completed your recording.
• Tap on OK to save the note.
A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within
the note.
•
94
To play the recorded note, tap on the speaker icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Synchronizing a Note
5.11.5 Synchronizing a Note
Like Tasks, Contacts and so on, the Notes program can be synchronized with Outlook on
your PC. In this way, all notes, recordings and drawings created in the Notes program are
copied to your PC and can be edited in Outlook’s Notes module.
•
To review the steps required to synchronize a note, with a Note page opened, tap on
Start>Help.
Follow the steps in NEO help file to synchronize your note.
5.12
Pictures & Videos
Pictures & Videos is a photo and video viewing program. This program also provides a
number of tools that allow you to crop, adjust picture contrast and brightness, zoom in and
out of photos and save your adjustments.
Important: The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats.
Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are
transferred to NEO.
5.12.1 Moving Photos to NEO
•
•
Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.
On your PC, using Windows Explorer (right-click My Computer and click on Explorer),
drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device, My Pictures folder.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
95
Chapter 5: Programs
Opening a Photo
5.12.2 Opening a Photo
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos. You’ll see a thumbnail of your photos.
Note: If you’ve stored your photos on a storage card, you’ll need to tap on the storage card
icon to display your photos.
•
Tap on a thumbnail to open a photo.
5.12.3 Deleting a Photo
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up
menu. Tap on Delete.
Confirm your choice when prompted.
5.12.4 Editing a Photo
• Tap a thumbnail photo to open it.
• Tap on Menu>Edit.
The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools are now
listed in the Menu.
5.12.5 Creating a Slide Show
To view a slide show:
• Tap on the Menu>Play Slide Show.
The slide show begins – in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five seconds,
one after the other.
96
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Internet Explorer
•
To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.
Pause
Play
Flip View
5.13
Previous
Next
Close
Internet Explorer
You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways: by connecting NEO directly to the Internet or by connecting through your PC while the hand-held is attached via ActiveSync (see
“ActiveSync®” on page 79).
5.13.1 Browsing Web Sites
There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that
found on NEO, sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer. You can enter URLs, set
a ‘home page’, turn images on and off, e-mail links to friends, and so on.
To go to a web site:
•
•
Connect NEO to the Internet. (If you’re not certain how to do this, tap on Start>Internet Explorer to display a blank window. Next, tap on Start>Help and follow the steps
listed.)
Tap on Start>Programs>Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
97
Chapter 5: Programs
Messaging
If Internet Explorer is also from the Today screen, tap on Start>Internet Explorer.
•
Tap on the address bar – the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered – to
highlight the current URL.
• Type a new URL in the address bar.
Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen display Internet
Explorer commands like those you find on your PC.
5.14
Messaging
The Messaging program is used to send and receive e-mail on NEO. To send and receive email, you’ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or
Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server.
For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one exception –
Outlook e-mail accounts are set up by default.
5.14.1 Folders
If you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with NEO. You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize
additional folders. The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server.
98
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link between
the messages on NEO and the copies on the mail server are broken. When you next connect,
the mail server will recognize that the messages are missing from NEO’s Inbox folder and
delete them from the server, preventing duplication of messages. Keep in mind however that
you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere
except with the hand-held.
For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the
server, making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from
NEO or your PC.
5.14.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
By synchronizing NEO’s Messaging program with Outlook on your PC, your e-mail is
available on both the hand-held and on your PC.
Note: Synchronizing e-mail does not require that NEO have an independent connection to
the Internet.
•
In ActiveSync on your PC, tap on Tools>Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen.
• Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail. Tap on OK.
Once you check E-mail for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as
part of the general synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with ActiveNEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
99
Chapter 5: Programs
Changing Synchronization Settings
Sync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on
NEO.
5.14.3 Changing Synchronization Settings
•
In ActiveSync on your PC, double-tap the E-mail item in the Sync Options tab.
•
Tap on the Select Folder button.
•
Add a checkmark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with
NEO, and tap on OK.
The E-mail Synchronization screen is displayed again.
100
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Remote Desktop Mobile
•
•
5.15
If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to Include file attachments. To limit the size, tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a size in the KB box.
Tap on OK.
Remote Desktop Mobile
This program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop programs from the server on NEO.
5.15.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Remote Desktop Mobile
In the Server dialog box, type the Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address, or
choose a server from the drop-down menu.
Tap on Connect.
In the Remote Desktop Connection window, type your user name, password, and
domain (if required). Tap on OK.
5.15.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session
Important: These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal Services
screen used to access the PC commands. Do NOT use the Start menu on
NEO.
•
•
In the Remote Desktop Connection window, tap on Start>Shutdown.
Tap on Disconnect>OK
5.15.3 Ending a Session
•
•
In the Terminal Services Client screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.
Tap on Log Off>OK.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
101
Chapter 5: Programs
Search
5.16
5.17
Search
•
Tap Start>Programs, and then tap on the Search icon.
•
•
In the Search for field, type the item for which you’re looking.
To narrow your search, tap on the Type drop-down menu and choose from a list of preexisting programs. To search through all files, leave this option at All Data.
Task Manager
The Task Manager lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a
number of options to manage these. Refer to “Task Manager” on page 153 for details.
5.18
102
Tasks
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 5: Programs
Wi-Fi Config
This program helps you stay ahead of your schedule by managing your tasks, appointments,
and so on. For details about Tasks, refer to “Task Notification” on page 56.
5.19
Wi-Fi Config
Refer to “Wireless Networking – Wi-Fi Config” on page 12 for details about setting up
your radio.
5.20
Windows Live
This applet provides access to a group of Windows Live services from NEO such as Hotmail,
Messenger, Maps, and so on. Tapping on this icon displays a setup wizard that will walk you
through setting up a Windows Live ID.
5.21
Windows Media
Windows Media Player Mobile allows you to play music and videos on NEO. You can use
Windows Media to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your device or on the
Web.
•
•
To work with this applet, tap on Start>Programs>Windows Media.
To find detailed instructions about this option, tap on Start>Help.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
103
6
SETTINGS
6.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
6.2 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
6.3 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.4 Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . .
6.4.2 One Shots. . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . .
6.4.4 Unicode Mapping . . . . . .
6.4.5 Scancode Remapping. . . . .
6.4.6 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . .
6.5 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Input Method Tab. . . . . . .
6.5.1.1 Word Completion . .
6.5.2 Options – Additional Choices
6.6 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 112
. 112
. 113
. 114
. 116
. 117
.120
.121
.121
.125
.125
.126
6.7 Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.7.1 Start Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.8 Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.9 Sound & Notifications
6.9.1 Sounds . . .
6.9.2 Notifications
6.10 Today Screen . . . .
6.10.1 Appearance
6.10.2 Items. . . .
6.11 System Tab Settings .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.128
.128
.128
.129
.129
.130
.130
6.12 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
6.13 About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
6.14 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
105
6.14.1 Battery Power . . . . .
6.14.2 External Power . . . . .
6.14.3 Intensity . . . . . . . .
6.15 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.15.1 Choosing A Certificate.
6.16 Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
132
133
133
134
136
136
6.17 Customer Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.18 Dr. Debug . . . .
6.18.1 Status . .
6.18.2 Settings .
6.18.3 Utilities .
6.19 Encryption . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136
137
137
138
138
6.20 Error Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.21 GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.22 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.22.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.22.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping .
6.23 Managed Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
141
142
143
144
6.24 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.24.1 Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.24.2 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.1 Battery Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.2 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.3 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.4 Built-In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.5 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.6 Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25.6.1 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
6.26 Regional Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
145
146
146
146
147
147
148
149
149
150
150
151
6.27 Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.28 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.29 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
106
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
6.30 Teklogix Imagers Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.30.1 Imager Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31 Teklogix Scanners Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu . .
6.31.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . .
6.31.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . .
6.31.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.32 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.32.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . . . . . . .
6.32.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.32.3 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.32.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.33 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.33.1 Advanced Interface And Network Settings .
6.33.2 Advanced Services Settings. . . . . . . . .
6.33.3 Radio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.33.4 User System Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.33.5 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.34 Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.155
.155
.156
.157
.157
.157
.158
.159
.159
.161
.162
.163
.166
.167
.168
.169
.170
.171
.172
.173
.174
.174
6.35 Connections Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
6.36 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.37 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.1 Paired Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.2 Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices.
6.37.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD).
6.37.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . .
6.37.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.3 Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.4 Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.5 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.37.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.177
.178
.180
.180
.181
.181
.182
.184
.185
.185
.186
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
107
6.38 Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.38.1 Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.38.2 Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.39 Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . .
6.39.1 Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.39.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings . . . . . . . . .
6.40 Wireless Manager Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components . . .
6.40.2 Setting Up A Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.3 Network Adaptor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.4 Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.5 VPN Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.6 Managing an Existing Connection. . . . . . . . . .
6.40.6.1 Editing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name . . .
6.40.7 Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.8 Proxy Server Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.40.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings
6.41 Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
187
188
189
189
190
193
194
194
195
195
196
196
197
197
198
199
200
201
202
Chapter 6: Settings
Settings
6.1
Settings
The Settings screen is divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections.
•
Tap on Start>Settings to display this screen.
Figure 6.1 Settings Tabs
6.2
Personal Settings
The Personal tab allows you to tailor the general behaviour of NEO such as defining input
methods, Start menu options, owner information, password assignment, sound specifications, and so on.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
109
Chapter 6: Settings
App Launch Keys
6.3
App Launch Keys
This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press.
To assign an application key:
•
Tap the Add button.
•
Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is
pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)
The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the
application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse
110
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
App Launch Keys
through the information in your hand-held until you locate the application you want
to launch.
• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.
The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to define special parameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can
leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to
launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an
application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word Mobile application,
you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.
•
Tap on OK.
•
If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this
final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key.
To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.
•
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
111
Chapter 6: Settings
Buttons Icon
6.4
Buttons Icon
•
Tap on this icon to display your options.
Note: The ‘Program Buttons’ option is not available on this unit.
6.4.1
Up/Down Control
Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the amount of time an
[Up/Down] key must be held before it starts repeating; sliding the bar to the right increases
this delay time.
Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an [Up/Down] button repeats
when pressed. Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.
112
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
One Shots
6.4.2
One Shots
The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on NEO behave. For each
modifier key – [ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN/ORANGE] and [FN/BLUE] – you have the
following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.
Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on
the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’
until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you
press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key
is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
Show Modifier Key State
When you enable Show modifier key state, a shift-state indicator icon
replaces the soft
keyboard icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. When a modifier key is pressed,
a square in this icon is highlighted. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon with a black frame around it.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
113
Chapter 6: Settings
Keyboard Macro Keys
6.4.3
Keyboard Macro Keys
The Macro tab is used to define up to 15 macros. Macros can be created to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER],
[BKSP] and [DEL] ([FN/BLUE]-[BKSP]), function keys and arrow keys. Each macro can
have up to 200 programmable characters (or “positions”).
Important: Macro keys are not physically stamped on this hand-held; ‘Scancode Remapping’ must be used to remap keyboard keys into macro keys so you can
execute the macros created here. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on
page 117 for details about mapping keys.
To create a macro:
Recording and Saving a Macro
•
114
In the Macro: menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1. Tap on the
Record button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Keyboard Macro Keys
A Record Macro screen is displayed.
•
Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and
numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.
• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on the Stop Recording
button.
A new screen – Verify Macro – displays the macro sequence you created.
•
•
Tap on the Save button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is listed in the
Macro screen.
Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.
Executing A Macro
To execute a macro:
•
Remember that you need to remap a key to act as a macro key using Scancode Mapping. Press the mapped macro key(s) to execute the macro.
Deleting a Macro
•
•
In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.
Tap on the Delete button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
115
Chapter 6: Settings
Unicode Mapping
6.4.4
Unicode Mapping
•
Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen.
The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL]
and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character
along with the Unicode value. For example, “a (U+0061)” indicates that the character “a” is
represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual
key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the
Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the
Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on [OK].
116
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Scancode Remapping
•
Tap on the Add/Change button.
•
•
Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.
Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field near the bottom of the screen, and
type a Unicode value for the highlighted key.
Note: To add a shifted state – [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT
Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’.
Removing Unicode Values
•
6.4.5
In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove button.
Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has
a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function, or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be
remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents
the [ENTER] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and
the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines
key presses that occur when the [FN/BLUE] modifier is on; the Orange table defines key
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
117
Chapter 6: Settings
Scancode Remapping
presses that occur when the [FN/ORANGE] modifier is on. The default mappings of these
scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using Scancode Remapping.
The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexadecimal. If
the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column
labelled ‘Function’.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns
remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number
(e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
•
118
Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Scancode Remapping
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.
•
Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode.
Note: The ‘Label’ field displays the default function of the scancode you
are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code
will be remapped to: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the
virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift
state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
•
•
Choose Virtual Key>Function or Macro.
Choose a function from the Function list, and tap on OK.
Editing a Scancode Remap
•
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Removing a Remap
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on
the Remove button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
119
Chapter 6: Settings
Lock Sequence
•
6.4.6
Tap on OK.
Lock Sequence
The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the hand-held keyboard to prevent keys from
being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
•
•
•
To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.
Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup.
In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you need to type to
unlock the keyboard.
Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone
attempting to use the NEO keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter
to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
Locked Keyboard
Icon
120
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Input
•
6.5
Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.
Input
The Input applet provides access to text input options you can use to tailor the soft keyboard,
block recognizer, letter recognizer and transcriber along with voice recording options.
6.5.1
Input Method Tab
A drop-down menu next to Input method allows you to tailor your methods of input – Block
Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer and Transcriber.
Block Recognizer
Block Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand-held
can recognize.
Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 73 for
additional details.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
121
Chapter 6: Settings
Input Method Tab
Keyboard Options
This screen is displayed when you choose Keyboard in the Input method drop-down menu.
You can use it to customize the soft keyboard. You can choose Large Keys or Small Keys to
increase or decrease the size of the keys displayed on the soft keyboard.
If you enable Use gestures for the following keys – these keys are removed from the soft
keyboard. Gestures are handwriting shortcuts for the keyboard keys.
Letter Recognizer Options
Letter Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand-held
can recognize.
Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 73 for additional
details.
To display additional letter recognition options, tap on the Options button in the Letter
Recognizer screen.
Figure 6.2 Letter Recognizer Quick Settings
122
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Input Method Tab
These options allow the Letter Recognizer to better interpret any specialized strokes and
accents you may wish to use.
Transcriber Options
Note: Before you can display the Options for Transcriber, you need to select Transcriber
as the active input method. Tap on the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon in the
taskbar, and choose Transcriber.
When you choose Transcriber as the input method, three tabs of options are available to you
– Quick Settings, Inking and Advanced.
Quick Settings
The Quick Settings tab allows you choose the writing direction – the icons indicate direction. In addition, you can choose to enable or disable the display of the Intro screen and the
sound each time you launch the Transcriber.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
123
Chapter 6: Settings
Input Method Tab
Inking
In the Inking tab, you are presented with a number of options. Recognition Delay allows you
to determine the time delay between writing something on the Transcriber screen and its
recognition into printed text.
Enabling Add space after automatically adds a space after each word you write. The Pen
option allows you to choose the line Width and Colour. Finally, tapping on Match Letter
Shapes to your writing displays a screen in which you can learn how to form letters to help
the hand-held to recognize the most often used characters.
Advanced
In this tab, Shorthand allows you to create a shortened word that the Transcriber will recognize and expand into a complete word automatically. You can also insert data such as a date
or run a program.
124
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Options – Additional Choices
6.5.1.1 Word Completion
This tab speeds the writing process regardless of the input method chosen. When you begin
entering a word, this option displays what it assumes is the complete word, saving you
having to type the word in its entirety. You can also tailor how and when you want word suggestions made.
6.5.2
Options – Additional Choices
This tab offers a few choices including choosing a voice recording format, zoom percentage
for writing and typing, automatic capitalization of the first letter in a sentence and automatic
scrolling when you’ve reached the bottom of the screen.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
125
Chapter 6: Settings
Lock
6.6
Lock
To protect the data stored in NEO, you can assign a password that must be entered each time
the unit is switched on.
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Lock icon.
It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you forget it, a ‘clean start’ must
be performed by certified Psion Teklogix personnel. A clean start returns the hand-held to
factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or SD memory card are preserved.
•
•
•
•
•
126
Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if device unused to turn on password protection.
Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to
enter your password.
In the Password type drop-down menu, choose the type of password you prefer to
assign. Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters. Strong
alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the
following: uppercase and lowercase alpha characters, numbers and punctuation.
Tap on the Hint tab to enter a word or phrase that will remind you of your password.
NEO will display the hint after the wrong password is entered five times.
Tap on OK. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save your password settings.
Tap on YES to save your password assignment.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Menus
6.7
Menus
•
6.7.1
Tap on Start>Settings>Menu icon to display options to help customise menus.
Start Menu Tab
This tab allows you to define the items that will be listed in your Start menu.
• In the Start Menu dialog box, tap on the items you want to appear in your Start menu.
The checked items will be listed in your Start menu.
6.8
Owner Information
This icon allows you to add your personal information to NEO. Some of this information
will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.
Important: Refer to “Ownership Information” on page 55 for details about this option.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
127
Chapter 6: Settings
Sound & Notifications
6.9
Sound & Notifications
This icon allows you to specify when NEO will emit sounds.
6.9.1
Sounds
•
•
•
6.9.2
Tap on Start>Settings.
Tap on the Sounds & Notifications icon.
Tap in the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event(s) that will cause your unit
to emit a sound.
Notifications
Tap here to play
your ring choices
Tap here to end
the ring test
This tab allows you to determine how you are notified about different events.
128
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Today Screen
•
•
6.10
Choose an event from the Events drop-down menu.
Choose the type of reminder – a special sound, a message or a flashing light – from the
drop-down menu next to Play sound.
Today Screen
This option allows you to tailor the appearance of the Today screen – the desktop screen.
6.10.1 Appearance
This screen allows you to customize the background displayed on the Today screen.
•
Choose the background you want to use from the list.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
129
Chapter 6: Settings
Items
6.10.2 Items
This tab allows you to choose and to sort the item(s) that you want listed in the Today screen.
•
•
6.11
Tap in the checkbox to the left of the item(s) you want displayed in the Today screen.
To rearrange the list of items, highlight the item you want to move up or down, and tap
on the Move Up or Move Down button. Keep in mind that the Date cannot be moved.
System Tab Settings
To display the icons grouped in the System tab:
•
130
Tap on Start>Settings, and tap on the System tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
About
6.12
About
Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab, and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs
that provide device information.
Version Tab
This tab outlines the Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic version, processor information, memory
size and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.
Device ID Tab
This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description (optional)
for NEO. This name is used by NEO to identify itself to other devices.
Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to connect
to a network because another device with the same name is already connected, you’ll need
to assign a new name here.
Copyrights
The Copyright tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on NEO.
6.13
About Device
Tapping on the About Device icon under Settings>System tab provides access to three tabs
related to NEO.
The Properties tab lists hardware information related to NEO. When the Properties tab is
opened, the properties are written to a text file called SystemProperties[mlbserialno].txt.
The Copyrights tab lists the copyrights that apply to your hand-held.
The Experience tab allows you to choose a category to help you define your Experience.
These categories include Microsoft settings, Psion Teklogix settings and Custom settings in a
drop-down menu. Each category contains a group of default settings. If you change a default
setting, the category is automatically changed to Custom settings.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
131
Chapter 6: Settings
Backlight
6.14
Backlight
Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab followed by the Backlight icon allows you to determine the power properties of NEO.
6.14.1 Battery Power
This tab allows you to tailor NEO backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life.
•
•
•
132
To define how long the backlight should stay on when NEO is not in use, tap in the
checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if device is not used for.
Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes the backlight will remain on when the hand-held is idle.
To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped, tap in the
checkbox to the left of this option.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
External Power
6.14.2 External Power
This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand-held is using external
rather than battery power.
Important: Refer to “Battery Power” on page 132 for details.
6.14.3 Intensity
This tab is used to adjust the light intensity of the display backlight and the keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises
the intensity.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
133
Chapter 6: Settings
Certificates
6.15
Certificates
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab.
Tap on the Certificates icon.
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the Certificates
tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the submitter. The hand-held checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification
authority that the hand-held explicitly trusts.
NEO has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Personal certificates establish your
identity, intermediate certificates, as the name suggests, identifies intermediate certification
authorities and root certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you can
connect.
Personal Tab
The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
•
•
134
To view additional information about a personal certificate, tap on a certificate in
the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a popup menu is displayed. Tap on the Delete command.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Certificates
Intermediate Certificates
The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities.
Root Certificates
•
•
•
To view details about a certificate—who issued the certificate, to whom it was issued,
the issue date and the expiry date—tap on a certificate in the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on a certificate.
In the pop-up menu, tap on the Delete command.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
135
Chapter 6: Settings
Choosing A Certificate
6.15.1 Choosing A Certificate
Normally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by
NEO. If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically, you must choose it from the Certificates list.
•
6.16
To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. NEO will connect automatically.
Clock & Alarms
Located under Start>Settings>System tab, the Clock & Alarm icon allows you to set the
current date and time, and it allows you to set up to three alarms.
Important: Refer to “Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm” on page 53 for details about these
options.
6.17
Customer Feedback
This applet allows you to participate in a Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement program. Choosing Send Feedback allows Microsoft to track how you use Windows Mobile.
6.18
Dr. Debug
Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic tool.
•
136
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on System tab>Dr. Debug icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Status
6.18.1 Status
This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the tools. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs
for your review.
6.18.2 Settings
•
•
Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu.
To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the
right of the Log Folder option.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
137
Chapter 6: Settings
Utilities
6.18.3 Utilities
The NetLog utility is used to log network traffic. When you tap on the Start button, debug
data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for
evaluation.
6.19
Encryption
This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card.
•
138
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Encryption icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Error Reporting
6.20
Error Reporting
Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
6.21
GPS (Global Positioning System)
With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact position on a
map. However, even without a GPS receiver, several different mapping programs can run on
your hand-held.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
139
Chapter 6: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System)
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System>GPS.
•
Tap on the GPS program port drop-down menu and choose the communication (COM)
port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.
Note: NEO may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, you’ll need to enter this information yourself. You
can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver.
•
Tap on the Hardware tab, and choose a GPS hardware port and the appropriate
Baud rate.
Windows Mobile 6.1 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However, some
programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:
140
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Manage Triggers
•
Tap on the Access tab, and disable Manage GPS automatically (recommended).
You can go to www.windowsmarketplace.com. if a map-viewing program is not included
with your hand-held.
6.22
Manage Triggers
Manage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices such as
RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both
single- and double-click, and the double-click time.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Manage Triggers.
In the Manage Triggers screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
141
Chapter 6: Settings
Trigger Mappings
6.22.1 Trigger Mappings
A ‘trigger mapping’ is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver
or application, the module(s) – sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)” – of the
trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external
hardware triggers or software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for example [F1]
cannot be mapped to the Decoded Scanner twice—even if the trigger type is
different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key
data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used
as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to
applications.
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between
0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger- Press Type” on page 144.
Show All Modules
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or
applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this
checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Add
Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog (see below), so that you can add new
trigger mappings.
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog, so that you can edit existing
trigger mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the
[ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded.
142
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Trigger Mappings
6.22.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping
•
Tap on Add to add a new trigger map, or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Expansion port trigger, Soft Scan and Scan for the trigger module selected.
Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers—for
example, to both the Imager and Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations
will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with
devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to
this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
143
Chapter 6: Settings
Managed Programs
Trigger- Press Type
You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally,
when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to
the “owner” — that is, the application receiving the trigger press information—followed by
a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released,
and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will occur. If a mapping with the Up/down
type has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of
trigger events.
Module To Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Show All Modules
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both
active and inactive, are displayed.
6.23
Managed Programs
Managed Programs lets you view, download and install applications that are deployed by
the System Center Mobile Device Manager (a server-side solution that enables IT to have
control of their device deployment with respect to security, management and access to the
corporate network). To access Managed Program:
144
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Memory
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Managed Programs icon.
Note: Your system administrator can provide the details you’ll need to use Managed
Programs effectively.
6.24
Memory
This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
145
Chapter 6: Settings
Main Tab
6.24.1 Main Tab
This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage.
6.24.2 Storage Card
The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with
the amount in use.
6.25
Power Icon
This icon allows you to view and manage battery use.
146
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Battery Tab
6.25.1 Battery Tab
This tab allows you to view the remaining battery capacity of the main battery.
6.25.2 Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab allows you to manage battery consumption.
On Battery Power
When NEO is operating on battery power, this option allows you to determine how long the
unit will remain on when it is not in use.
•
Tap in the checkbox to the left of On battery power to enable this option. Tap in the
drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it
shuts down.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
147
Chapter 6: Settings
Battery Details
On External Power
When the hand-held is drawing external rather than battery power, this option allows you to
determine the number of minutes the unit will remain on when not in use.
•
Tap in the checkbox to the left of On external power to enable this option. Tap in the
drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it
shuts down.
6.25.3 Battery Details
This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in NEO.
This is a view-only screen.
148
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Built-In Devices
6.25.4 Built-In Devices
This dialog box allows you to enable (provide power) to the device(s) installed in your unit.
Tapping on OK activates your selections.
6.25.5 Card Slots
Slot Power Status
Selecting the card slot listed in this dialog box supplies power to the enabled slot. Clicking
on the Apply button activates your selection. If the Apply button in is greyed out, the slot has
already been enabled.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
149
Chapter 6: Settings
Suspend Threshold
6.25.6 Suspend Threshold
This applet allows you to determine the amount of battery power that you want to reserve in
the main battery to protect the data stored in NEO.
6.25.6.1 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
The Suspend Threshold lets you determine when NEO will shut down. If the slider is left at
the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the hand-held will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose
Maximum Backup Time, the hand-held will shut off with more energy left in the battery so
RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
Important: Selecting ‘Maximum backup time’ reserves approximately 20% of the
battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system
RAM memory is lost and the unit must reboot.
In most real-time transaction environments, this is not a problem (it only
takes a few seconds to boot). However, batch transaction environments,
where data is not saved to non-volatile memory (a microSD FLASH card),
may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion Teklogix does
not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM.
NEO’s Windows environment does not store any critical data in RAM (such
as the registry or file system).
If the user's application does not save data to RAM, Psion Teklogix recommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to
maximize battery run time.
150
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Regional Settings
Important: Once the main battery is removed, the super capacitor will preserve the data
stored on NEO for approximately 10 minutes. It is critical that you install a
charged main battery before this time elapses.
6.26
Regional Settings
•
To display the Regional Settings screen, tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the
System tab followed by the Regional Settings icon.
• Tap on the drop-down menu to choose your language and region.
Once you’ve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way numbers, currency, the time and the date appear in NEO.
•
Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item will be displayed on your hand-held.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
151
Chapter 6: Settings
Remove Programs
6.27
Remove Programs
Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be
removed from your unit.
•
6.28
To remove a program, highlight it and then click on the Remove button.
Screen
This icon allows you to change screen orientation, align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn
ClearType on and off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the hand-held screen.
152
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Task Manager
•
Tap Start>Settings>System tab, and then tap on the Screen icon.
Important: Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 37 for details.
6.29
Task Manager
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of options to manage these.
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon – the
Task Manager screen is opened.
•
To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on the End
Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
Task Manager Menu
The Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
153
Chapter 6: Settings
Task Manager
•
Tap on the Menu softkey in the taskbar.
•
•
•
•
Switch To: Makes the highlighted application active.
End All Tasks: Shuts down all applications listed.
View: Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes.
Sort By: Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size,
CPU or application or process Name.
Refresh: Updates the list of applications or processes.
Exit: Closes the Task Manager.
•
•
154
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Teklogix Imagers Settings
6.30
Teklogix Imagers Settings
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings.
The principal uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images.
Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your
hand-held.
To launch this applet:
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab, and then tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon.
Important: Refer to Appendix B: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for details about this
applet.
6.30.1 Imager Demo
An Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
155
Chapter 6: Settings
Teklogix Scanners Settings
•
6.31
Tap on Start>Programs, and then tap on the Imager icon.
Teklogix Scanners Settings
The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which
you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
•
156
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Teklogix
Scanner icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu
6.31.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of
the following: Decoded (internal) and Decoded (Intermec ISCP). If an HHP 5000 imager is
installed in your unit, refer to Appendix B: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for details about
setting up your imager.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes
it supports.
Important: Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings” provides descriptions of the bar codes
listed in the scanner menus.
6.31.2 Options Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated
with your scanner.
6.31.2.1 Double Click Parameters
Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the
time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this
feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in
the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
157
Chapter 6: Settings
Options Tab
initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, doubleclicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Click Data
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent
to the application installed in your hand-held following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the
keypress is displayed.
6.31.2.2 Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the
screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible
only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is
cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the
scanner is activated.
Scan Result Time (sec)
The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan
results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a
value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box
appears where you can enter a value.
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point
the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.
Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep
These parameters determine whether or not the hand-held emits an audible scanner ‘beep’
when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.
Soft Scan Timeout
This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter
determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.).
158
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Translations Tab
Scan Log File
If this parameter is enabled, the input bar code and the modified/translated output bar code
are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is
enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log
file is written to persistent storage.
6.31.2.3 Data Handling
This option allows you to choose the code page NEO will use to display scanned data –
Default Local ASCII or ISO-8859-1 Latin 1.
Codepage:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page NEO will
use.
If you choose Default Local ASCII, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if
the local OS uses double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data
through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately, in this example, using doublebyte characters.
If you choose ISO-8859-1 Latin 1, data will be displayed according to the character mapping
of this Latin 1 code page, ignoring the local OS code page.
6.31.3 Translations Tab
The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in
sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
159
Chapter 6: Settings
Translations Tab
if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a case fails, the entire case
fails.
•
160
In the Translation tab, tap on the Case # to create rules.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Translations Tab
•
Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
6.31.3.1 Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
No rule – ignored.
Match at index – matches the match string at a specified index.
Match and replace at index – matches the match string at a specified index and
replaces/changes it.
Replace at index – replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
Add barcode prefix/suffix – adds a global prefix or suffix.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
161
Chapter 6: Settings
Total Recall
•
•
Verify barcode size – verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned
first, before creating subsequent rules.
Search and replace – replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule
cannot fail.)
Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account
when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is important, it
should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.
Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file
(see “Scan Log File” on page 159) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are
trying to determine why a rule is failing.
6.32
Total Recall
Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to back up/restore applications
and settings.
Note: In Windows Mobile 6.1, the registry and installed programs are stored in the Flash
file system and are not lost on reset. However, in special cases where Psion Teklogix
personnel find it necessary to perform a clean start, this will reset not only the registry settings to factory defaults, but will also erase any files or applications stored or
installed on the built-in Flash file system, including any Total Recall profiles. This is
why any data that needs to be protected must be stored on a SD/MMC card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.
•
162
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab. Tap on the Total Recall icon.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Creating A Backup Profile
6.32.1 Creating A Backup Profile
In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Profile, Restore Profile,
View Profile and Delete Profile.
•
Tap on the Create Profile button to begin the process.
Profile Information
This dialog box displays the default profile name, the type of restore – AutoRestore or ManualRestore, and the possible storage destination for the profile file.
•
•
•
To change the Profile Name (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile
Location field.
In the Name field, type a new name. (You may need to move the onscreen keyboard
down to make the Name field visible.)
Tap on OK to save the new profile name.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
163
Chapter 6: Settings
Creating A Backup Profile
•
Next, choose the profile Type you want to create:
- AutoRestore – creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset
or a clean reset.
- ManualRestore – creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.
•
•
•
Finally, if you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the
[...] button to the right of the Profile Location field.
Navigate to the new location, and tap on OK to save it.
Tap on the [-->] (Next) button.
Defining the Type of Backup
Default Backup
Default Backup is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the Registry are saved. Choose Advanced Backup only if you want to tailor your backup.
164
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Creating A Backup Profile
Advanced Backup
Choosing Advanced Backup allows you to define what you would like to include in your
backup profile.
•
Tap in the checkbox next to the option(s) listed here to tailor what you want included in
the backup.
Once you’ve defined the type of profile you want to create:
•
Tap on the Create Profile button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
165
Chapter 6: Settings
Restoring A Profile
The options you chose to back up appear in on the screen as the backup progresses. When
the backup is complete, the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup
profile.
6.32.2 Restoring A Profile
To manually restore a profile:
166
•
•
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Restore Profile.
Tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile field, and locate your backup file.
•
Tap on the backup profile you want to restore.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Viewing a Profile
•
In the Profile restore screen, click on the [-->] (Next) button.
•
In the final screen, click on Restore Profile to restore the files to NEO.
6.32.3 Viewing a Profile
To view a profile:
•
•
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on View Profile.
Tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile field, and locate your backup file.
•
Tap on the backup profile you want to view.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
167
Chapter 6: Settings
Deleting a Profile
•
In the Profile view screen, click on the [-->] (Next) button.
In the final screen, click on View Details to display the backup file on your hand-held.
6.32.4 Deleting a Profile
168
•
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile.
•
Locate your backup file, and tap on it.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
TweakIT
A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file.
•
6.33
Tap on Yes to delete the file.
TweakIT
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the TweakIT Settings icon.
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network
and servers), User settings (font size and docking port message), and provides a
Registry Editor.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
169
Chapter 6: Settings
Advanced Interface And Network Settings
6.33.1
Advanced Interface And Network Settings
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol, version 6, that has been published to use
128-bit IP address (replacing version 4).
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, NEO logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password
string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands
are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.
170
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Advanced Services Settings
6.33.2 Advanced Services Settings
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize NEO time with that
of the time server. A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
171
Chapter 6: Settings
Radio Features
6.33.3 Radio Features
AP Density
This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which NEO’s radio will begin
searching for a new Access Point (AP): High, Medium or Low. If this option is set to High,
the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong signal
strength. Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal strength is
significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point.
Depending on your site configuration – for example, the shelving, the Access Point coverage, etc. – a higher setting may improve through-put, increase and maintain signal strength,
and reduce missed transmissions.
Radio Power Management
When this option is enabled, access points that support it will use Radio Power Management
guidelines to control the hand-held radio. Access points determine how often NEO radio
172
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
User System Setting
enters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption. Another
benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled, even when no activity is detected, the access point does not disassociate the hand-held.
6.33.4 User System Setting
Docking Port Message
Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the handheld is docked.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
173
Chapter 6: Settings
Registry Editor
6.33.5 Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of
registry keys and values. Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to NEO.
6.34
Windows Update
This program checks for software updates, and if found, downloads updates to NEO. You
can choose to have updates checked automatically, or if you prefer, you can determine when
your unit will check for updates.
6.35
Connections Tab
This tab is used to set up connections using Bluetooth and 802.11 radios.
174
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Connections Tab
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab to display your connection options.
Navigation Bar
Tap on these connectivity hotkeys
to display Notification Bubbles
Notification Bubble
Navigation Bar Connectivity Hotkeys
Some of the connectivity icons in the Navigation Bar along the top of the screen are hotkeys
that offer shortcuts to connection setups. Tapping on a hotkey displays a bubble that provides information about your connections and provides a shortcut to the Wireless Manager
applet where you can set up your connections.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
175
Chapter 6: Settings
Connections Tab
Automatic Network Detection
If a wireless network is available when you switch on your unit, a notification bubble may
appear letting you know which networks have been found. You can choose a network
from here.
Tapping on Connect in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen will automatically connect
to a network that’s already been set up. Tapping on Settings in the network bubble will
launch the Wireless Manager applet.
If you prefer not see this notification bubble, you can tap on the Menu button in the softkey
bar, and choose not to display the notification bubble.
Multiple Notifications
If more than one item is detected, all the items can be accessed by tapping on the small multiple notification icon shaped like a word bubble in the Navigation Bar. Tapping on it
displays a group of notification icons.
Multiple Notification Icon
176
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Beam
Tapping on any of these icons displays an associated notification bubble with information
about and access to the missed call(s) or voice message(s).
6.36
Beam
If your unit is equipped with an IrDA end-cap, tapping on Beam allows you to enable
Receive all incoming beams so that your unit can accept incoming data from other
IrDA devices.
6.37
Bluetooth Setup
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended
for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that
operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within
range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radiobased link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna.
Switching On the Bluetooth Radio
Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with NEO, make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled and that the radio is switched on; it is enabled by default. If,
for some reason, it has been disabled:
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab and then, tap on the Power icon to display the
Power dialog box.
Tap on the Built-in Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth.
Next, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.
Tap on the Mode tab, and check Turn on Bluetooth. Tap OK.
Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of NEO.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
177
Chapter 6: Settings
Paired Tab
•
If needed, set your Bluetooth device to visible (discoverable) so that the hand-held can
detect it and establish a connection.
6.37.1 Paired Tab
This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is
<Device Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as
the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service.
To learn how to scan for devices that will appear in this tab, review “Device Tab” on
page 180.
Note: If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed
in bold typeface in this list.
178
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Paired Tab
•
Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated popup menu.
This is a service-dependent menu – that is, it varies slightly depending on the service chosen
in the Servers tab. Refer to “Servers Tab” on page 184 for more details.
Query Services and Remove Commands
Note: The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service-dependent
menus, regardless of the type of service chosen.
•
•
Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.
Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands
The OPP defines two roles – a Push Server and a Push Client. Push Server is the device that
provides an object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to
and from the Push Server.
OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option:
•
Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected.
When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file
transmission.
HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands
The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices.
HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
179
Chapter 6: Settings
Device Tab
•
•
•
Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset.
Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset.
Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be
adjusted.
6.37.2 Device Tab
This tab discovers and displays Bluetooth devices.
6.37.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices
Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of NEO and lists them in this tab. Any existing
devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.
Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected
services.
Note: To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device, refer to “Filtering By
Class of Device (COD)” on page 181.
180
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Device Tab
6.37.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD)
This menu allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only computers within range of NEO are
listed in the Device tab. Choosing All lists all detected devices.
6.37.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu
The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a
device from the list.
Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered
device. An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
181
Chapter 6: Settings
Device Tab
Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful
if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed
remotely.
Delete removes this device from the list.
6.37.2.4 Pairing a Device
To pair devices:
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
• Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.
• When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair.
• In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair.
An Authentication dialog box is displayed.
•
•
If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
To proceed without authentication, tap on Next.
Note: If a remote device has authentication enabled and you’ve skipped the authentication
process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to
NEO. Tap on Yes and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on Done.
182
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Device Tab
After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for
that device.
•
•
Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
Click on Done.
Note: If you choose a service requiring additional information, a dialog box is automatically displayed where further details can be completed.
The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiring additional information –
in this case, the Serial Port Service.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three different modes: Serial, ActiveSync and Scanner
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
183
Chapter 6: Settings
Servers Tab
•
•
•
Serial is used for simple serial port communication.
ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth.
Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar
code and NEO.
Once you’ve completed the information:
•
Tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done.
6.37.3 Servers Tab
When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to NEO, the remote device
is considered the ‘Bluetooth master’ and the hand-held, the ‘Bluetooth slave’. In order for
the remote device to connect to NEO, the hand-held must offer a service in the form of a
server. The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three
server services available: Serial, Scanner and OBEX OPP.
Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the
drop-down menu. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, an application must be open
(connected) to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect.
Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service
(SCS). This is used for Bluetooth bar code scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens
the server port and handles the scanner input.
OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed
on NEO after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth
devices to send files to this device.
•
184
Tap on the checkbox to activate the server – the associated port name is displayed beside
the server name.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Mode Tab
6.37.4 Mode Tab
Turn on Bluetooth allows you to enable or disable the Bluetooth radio. Discoverable determines whether the hand-held is visible to other devices.
Device Scan Duration can be used to control the duration in which NEO scans for other devices. The higher the value assigned, the greater the scan duration.
Printer Port allows you to choose a port for the printer. Keep in mind that you need to
choose a port from the Select Port drop-down menu before you can enable Printer Port.
6.37.5 About Tab
Device Name displays the broadcasted name of NEO. The name can be changed in the
About applet – tap on Start>Settings>System tab>About icon. Tap on the Device ID, and
change the name.
Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
185
Chapter 6: Settings
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware.
Component indicates the version of the Psion Teklogix Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager,
drivers, etc).
Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific NEO.
6.37.6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
Once you’ve completed the Bluetooth settings, you can go ahead and set up communication
through your Bluetooth-equipped phone.
Before you begin, make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on, that the Bluetooth
radios in NEO and your phone are enabled (turned on), and that the hand-held and phone are
within 10 metres of each other. Both should be discoverable.
1. Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.
2. Tap on the Connections icon. Tap on Add a new modem connection.
3. Type a name for the connection.
4. Tap on the Select a modem drop-down menu, and choose Bluetooth. Tap on Next.
5. Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to be pairable
in order to accept a bonding request. Refer to your phone documentation for additional information.
6. If the phone appears in the My Connections list, skip to step 13.
7. In the list, tap the phone and then tap on the Next button.
8. In the PIN screen, type a personal identification number (PIN) – you can enter up to
16 characters.
9. Enter the same PIN on the phone.
186
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Connection Properties
10. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field.
11. Tap on the Finish button.
12. In the My Connections list, tap on the phone and then on Next.
13. Enter the dial-up phone number for this connection, and tap on Next.
14. In the User name, Password and Domain fields, enter the logon information for this
connection, and tap on Finish.
You’re ready to use the Bluetooth phone connection, for example, to send and receive email, browse the Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.
6.38
Connection Properties
This applet is used to set up serial modem connections.
•
Tap Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Connection Properties icon.
•
Choose a connection from the drop-down menu, and tap on Edit Properties.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
187
Chapter 6: Settings
Port Settings
6.38.1 Port Settings
Baud Rate
In the Baud rate drop-down menu, choose a new baud rate. Check your modem documentation for the appropriate baud rate.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port. Possible
values are: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the
port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous
communication.
Flow Control
This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held. NEO can perform
Software or Hardware handshaking, or you can choose None.
188
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Call Options
6.38.2 Call Options
Cancel Call If Not Connected Within
Tap in the checkbox to enable this option to make certain that NEO does not stay online too
long while waiting to connect with a network.
Enter the number of seconds after which the call will be cancelled.
Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing
To speed connection when using a modem, disable this option – tap in the checkbox to the
left of this option.
Wait For Credit Card
If you are paying for calls with a credit card, enter the number of seconds you want NEO to
wait for a credit card prompt.
Extra Dial-String Modem Commands
Type your credit card number in this field.
6.39
Connections – Connecting to the Internet
To activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment (e.g., radio) is enabled
in NEO.
You’ll need the following information from your ISP to make an Internet connection:
•
•
•
ISP server phone number,
user name, and
password.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
189
Chapter 6: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
1. Tap Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.
2. Tap on the Connections icon.
Note: In the Connections window, the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and
manage existing ones. The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network. If you
need to change these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator before
making changes.
3. Under My ISP, tap on Add a new modem connection.
4. In the Select a modem drop-down menu, choose a modem connection. If you
haven’t already created a modem connection, refer to “Modem Connection Setup”
on page 190.
5. To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For example, launch
Internet Explorer on NEO to browse the Internet. Your hand-held automatically
connects.
Note: To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add a new connection under My Work Network.
6.39.1 Modem Connection Setup
Before you begin, you’ll need the following information from your ISP or network administrator: telephone number, password, domain name, and TCP/IP settings.
If your hand-held unit does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card
in the unit.
1. Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
2. To create a new connection in either My ISP or My Work Network, tap on Add a
new modem connection.
3. In the Make New Connection screen, type a name for the connection.
190
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
4. In the drop-down menu under Select a modem, tap on your modem type.
Note: If your modem is not listed in the drop-down menu, choose Hayes Compatible
on COM1.
5. Tap on the Next button.
6. In the next screen, enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. If, for
example, you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at the beginning of the
phone number.
7. Tap on the Next button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
191
Chapter 6: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
8. Type the User Name, Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or
network administrator.
Note: Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings. For information
about the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” on page 193.
Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:
To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit card options.
To change port settings.
To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not
dynamically assign addresses.
9. Tap on the Finish button.
If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” in the
next section.
192
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
6.39.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings
TCP/IP Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
If you need to make changes, contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses.
Server Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP
addresses. NEO supports a variety of name resolution options: DNS, Alt DNS, WINS and
Alt WINS.
Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need, and can
also provide the server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate addresses are
available. An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is
not available.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
193
Chapter 6: Settings
Wireless Manager Icon
6.40
Wireless Manager Icon
The Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager, providing access to Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth connections.
Important: The ‘Wireless Manager’ option provides detailed Help files to assist you in
setting up your hand-held. Help is available from the Connections tab – not
from within the Wireless Manager dialog box.
To access Wireless Manager help files, tap on Start>Settings>Connections
tab. Tap on Start>Settings>Help.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Wireless Manager icon.
6.40.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components
To disable all wireless components when, for example, you are taking your hand-held onto a
plane where wireless connections need to be shut down:
• Tap on the Disable All button.
To enable wireless components:
• Tap on Enable All.
To disable a particular radio connection rather than all connections:
194
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Setting Up A Network Card
•
Highlight an Available (enabled) radio listed in this dialog box, and then tap on the
Disable button.
6.40.2 Setting Up A Network Card
Network (802.11) cards are used to connect to a network so that you can browse the Internet,
download e-mail and so on. You can connect to an existing network or you can set up a new
connection on NEO.
Important: NEO is equipped with context sensitive Help Files. If you find that you’re
unsure how to proceed with a network connection at any point during setup,
tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen.
6.40.3 Network Adaptor Cards
When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the Network Settings screen
is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card. If it does not appear, or if you
want to change settings:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections.
Tap on the Network Cards icon.
•
If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate adaptor, and
then tap on the IP Address and/or Name Servers tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
195
Chapter 6: Settings
Changing Network Card Settings
Note: Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these settings
unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.
•
•
If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your network. Refer to
the documentation shipped with your network card for details.
To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet Explorer). NEO
will connect automatically.
6.40.4 Changing Network Card Settings
•
•
•
If you use your network card in two locations like work and home, you’ll need to
change the network to which the network card connects.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Network Cards.
In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box, tap on the drop-down menu below My
network card connects to, choose either The Internet or Work.
6.40.5 VPN Connection Setup
A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.
Before you begin, you need the following information from your network administrator:
password, domain name, TCP/IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server.
•
•
•
•
196
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap on Add a new VPN server connection.
In the Name field, type a name for this connection.
In Host name/IP, type the VPN server name or IP address.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Managing an Existing Connection
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for NEO:
IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. Your network administrator will let you know which option
applies to your unit.
Tap on Next.
Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose a pre-shared key, type
the key provided by your network administrator.
Tap on Next.
Type your user name, password and domain name. If a domain name was not provided to you, try the connection without entering a domain name.
Note: Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will need to make
changes only under only the following circumstances:
The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses, and
TCP/IP settings need to be entered.
Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.
If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” on page 193
for details about this tab.
•
•
Tap on Finish.
Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The VPN connection will start automatically.
6.40.6 Managing an Existing Connection
Once you’ve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first Connections screen –
Manage existing connections.
6.40.6.1 Editing a Connection
•
•
Tap on Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.
Tap on Manage existing connections.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
197
Chapter 6: Settings
Managing an Existing Connection
Tap here
•
•
To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the connection you
want to activate. Choose Connect from the pop-up menu.
To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete.
Choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
Note: You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button. To make
changes to the settings for this connection, tap on Edit.
6.40.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name
Your hand-held has two sets of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. If you
want to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you, follow these
steps.
•
•
•
198
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network or My ISP, tap on Manage existing connections.
Tap on the General tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Selecting a Network
•
•
Type the name you prefer in the field below Enter a name for these settings.
Tap on OK.
6.40.7 Selecting a Network
Important: Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your ISP or
network administrator before making any changes.
Private networks are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for home
connection to your ISP. The My Work Network settings are used for private network connections (corporate networks), while My ISP settings are used for Internet network connections.
When you use programs such as Internet Explorer, NEO automatically connects using
private network settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP, depending on specifications. You can determine how your hand-held connects.
•
•
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Tap on the Advanced tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
199
Chapter 6: Settings
Proxy Server Setup
•
•
Tap on Select Networks.
In the appropriate lists, choose My ISP or My Work Network.
6.40.8 Proxy Server Setup
Note: If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization, NEO
will download the appropriate settings from your PC. If these settings are not on your
PC, or if they need to be changed, you’ll need to set up the proxy server connection
manually.
To set up the proxy server connection manually, you’ll need the following information:
proxy server name, server type, port, type of Socks protocol used and the user name and
password.
•
•
200
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap on Set up my proxy server.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 6: Settings
Proxy Server Setup
•
•
•
Add a checkmark next to This network connects to the Internet and This network
uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet.
In the Proxy server field, type the proxy server name.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Note: If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type,
you’ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK. Advanced settings are described in “Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings” on page 201.
6.40.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings
•
To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type, tap on the
Advanced button.
•
Tap on the proxy type you want to change. For the appropriate server type, type the
proxy server name and port.
Tap on OK.
•
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
201
Chapter 6: Settings
Wireless Statistics
6.41
Wireless Statistics
•
•
202
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Wireless Statistics icon to display the communication statistics of your wireless connection along with the radio card name, MAC
address, driver version and NDIS Compliance information.
Tap on the Zero button to reset the statistics.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
7
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES
7.1 Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Attaching the Hand Strap. .
7.1.2 Belt Clip Installation . . . .
7.1.3 The Expansion Port. . . . .
7.1.4 The Pistol Grip With Stylus
7.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.205
.206
.208
.210
.210
. 211
7.3 Adaptor/Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050 . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054 . . . . . . . .
7.4 Charging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Installation – Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Desktop Docking Station – PX3001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1 Desktop Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 Charging a Battery Installed in NEO. . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.3 Charging a Spare Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.4 Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.5 Docking Station Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . .
7.5.6 Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock . . .
7.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . .
7.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
7.5.7 Linking a NEO to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.8 Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.8.1 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.9 Troubleshooting USB Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PX3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.212
.212
.214
.215
.216
.216
.216
.216
.217
.217
.218
.218
.219
.219
.219
.219
.220
.220
.220
.220
.221
.221
7.7 Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
7.8 Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
203
7.8.1 Quad Docking Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2 Quad Docking Station Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.3 Inserting a NEO in the Quad Docking Station . . .
7.8.4 Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.5 Battery Charging – LED Behaviour. . . . . . . . .
7.8.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . .
7.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked.
7.9 Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
223
223
223
223
224
224
224
224
224
225
225
225
226
226
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Carrying Accessories
7.1
Carrying Accessories
There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably
with NEO.
Table 7.1 Carrying Accessories
Carrying Accessory
Model Number
Hand Strap
PX3024
Wrist Strap (with stitched stylus holder)
PX3028
Carrying Holster (compatible with pistol grip)
PX3020
Carrying Case (leather with protective key cover and clip)
PX3029
Shoulder Strap
PX3022
Belt Kit (includes Belt Clip, Adaptor Plate and screws)
PX3025
Pistol Grip
PX3030
Important: Carrying accessory screws have adhesive pre-applied to them. Do not add
adhesives to secure screws on carrying accessories; these chemicals may
damage the plastic casing.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
205
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching the Hand Strap
7.1.1
Attaching the Hand Strap
The hand strap provides a secure means for operators to carry NEO.
Figure 7.1 The Hand Strap
Eyelet for Screw
Eyelet for
Attaching Tether
Stylus Holder
Elastic Strap
Quick Release
Buckle
Adjustable Velcro
Clasp
Lanyard
•
Thread the lanyard attached to the quick release buckle through one of the accessory
attachment points – the eyelets on the either side of the base of the unit. You may find
Figure 7.2 useful as a reference.
Figure 7.2 Attaching The Quick Release Buckle
1
•
206
2
3
Guide the quick release buckle through the lanyard loop to secure it to the unit.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching the Hand Strap
•
To attach the hand strap, align the eyelet at the top of the hand strap with the threaded
insert near the corner of the hand-held, and secure it in place using the M2x6 screw
included with the hand strap.
Figure 7.3 Attaching the Hand Strap
4
•
Snap the hand-strap buckle into the lanyard quick release buckle.
5
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
207
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Belt Clip Installation
•
Pull up the velcro clasp to adjust the hand strap to fit your hand as required.
6
Stylus Holder
Note: In addition to the hand strap, the lanyard with quick release buckle is also used to
attach the wrist strap (shipped with the hand-held) and the optional shoulder strap to
NEO.
7.1.2
Belt Clip Installation
Figure 7.4 Belt Clip Installation Kit
Belt Clip
Adaptor Plate
Screw M2 x 6
Belt Clip Attached Here
Foam Pad Under
Folded End
•
208
Metal Eyelet
Metal Insert
on NEO Unit
Position the belt clip adaptor plate so that the thicker, folded end aligns with the
angled scanner section on the back of NEO as illustrated in Figure 7.5.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Belt Clip Installation
Figure 7.5 Aligning the Belt Clip Adaptor Plate for Installation
Folded End
Angled Scanner
Section
•
To attach the belt clip adaptor plate to NEO, thread the screws through the eyelets into
the metal inserts on NEO.
Figure 7.6 Attaching The Adaptor Plate
Attach Belt Clip here
Metal Insert
•
1
2
Metal Insert
With the adaptor plate attached to NEO, join the plastic belt clip (included in your kit) to
the adaptor plate.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
209
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Expansion Port
7.1.3
The Expansion Port
NEO is equipped with an expansion port so that customised modules (e.g., RFID) can be
easily added to your hand-held computer as they are required.
Expansion Port
Expansion
Port Covered
Expansion
Port Cover
Important: Do not remove the expansion port cover unless an expansion module is
being installed.
7.1.4
The Pistol Grip With Stylus
The pistol grip has been designed to easily attach to NEO without tools or screws. For added
convenience, the pistol grip is equipped with a stylus inserted in the handle.
•
•
210
Remove the expansion port cover on the back of NEO. Store the cover in the underside
of the pistol grip – you’ll see an indent in the shape of the port cover in the pistol plastic.
Position the pistol grip over the slots moulded into the back of NEO, and snap it into
place – no screws required.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Battery
Figure 7.7 Attaching the Pistol Grip
Pistol Grip
Stylus
Thumb Latch
Release
To release the pistol grip:
•
Press the thumb latch release, and lift the pistol grip out.
Note: To maintain proper operation, ensure that the expansion port and the pistol grip contacts are dry and free of debris. If necessary, use a soft cloth moistened with alcohol
to clean the contacts.
7.2
The Battery
Important: Carefully review the “NEO Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty
Guide”, PN 8000175, before handling a battery.
NEO operates on a 3300 mAh lithium-ion battery pack – Model No. WA3006.
Note: Review Chapter 8: “Specifications” for detailed information.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
211
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Adaptor/Cable Options
7.3
Adaptor/Cable Options
The following are adaptors that can be ordered for NEO:
Table 7.2 Adaptor/Cable Model Numbers And Descriptions
Model Number
7.3.1
Adaptor/Cable Description
PX3052
Cable/Dongle – Micro-USB to Ethernet
PX3053
Cable – Micro-USB to USB ‘A’ Receptacle
PX3058
Cable – Micro-USB to USB ‘A’
PX3050
Adaptor – Hand-Held to RS232 Connector
PX3054
Adaptor – Hand-held to Micro-USB with DC Jack
PX3056
Adaptor – Cigarette Lighter
RS-232 Adaptor – Model No. PX3050
This adaptor is equipped with an RS-232 port via a standard non-powered DB9 connector.
Carrying devices such as the wrist strap can still be used when the adaptor is attached to the
hand-held.
Slot to Accommodate
Carrying Strap
RS-232 Port
To attach the adaptor to NEO:
•
•
212
Make certain that the adaptor connector and NEO docking port are free of dust or any
other debris before connecting them.
A slot on the side of the adaptor is provided to accommodate the carrying strap. Thread
the carrying strap through the slot on the adaptor. (Refer to Figure 7.8 on page 213.)
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Figure 7.8 Threading Wrist Strap Through Adaptor
Slot to Accommodate
Carrying Strap
Thread Carrying Strap
Through Slot in Adaptor
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054
•
7.3.2
Align the docking port on the base of NEO with the adaptor, and gently snap the adaptor
into place.
Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054
This adaptor is equipped with a micro-USB port along with a DC IN socket. When attached
to NEO, the adaptor allows you to connect an AC wall adaptor (Model No. PX3012) or an
automotive power adaptor (Model No. PX3056) to the hand-held. The micro-USB port
allows you to utilize the micro-USB to Ethernet cable (Model No. PX3052) and the micro-
214
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging Options
USB to USB ‘A’ (Model No. PX3058 & PX3053). Carrying devices such as the wrist strap
can still be used when the adaptor is attached to the hand-held.
Slot to Accommodate
Wrist Strap
Micro-USB Port
DC IN Socket
To attach this adaptor:
•
•
•
7.4
Make certain that the adaptor connector and NEO docking port are free of dust or any
other debris before connecting them.
A slot on the side of the adaptor is provided to accommodate the wrist strap. Thread the
wrist strap through the slot on the adaptor. (See Figure 7.8 on page 213 for details.)
Align the docking port on the base of NEO with the adaptor, and gently snap the adaptor
into place.
Charging Options
Psion Teklogix offers a variety of charging options for NEO. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Adaptor – Model No. PX3012 with PX3054
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor – Model No. PX3056 with PX3054
Desktop Docking Station – Model No. PX3001
Desktop Docking Station with Integrated V.92 Analog Modem – Model No. PX3008
Quad Docking Station – Model No. PX3004 PC and PX3004 NPC
Battery Chargers for charging batteries only:
- Quad Battery Charger – Model No. WA3004
- Single Battery Charger – Model No. WA3001
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
215
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Installation – Docking Stations
7.4.1
Installation – Docking Stations
When installing a docking station, consider the following guidelines.
•
•
Keep docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.
Docking stations will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0 °C
to 45 °C (32 °F to 113 °F). It is recommended that the docking station be operated at
room temperature—between 18 °C and 25 °C (64 °F to 77 °F) for maximum
performance.
After unpacking your unit:
•
•
7.4.2
Visually inspect the docking station for possible damage.
Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Power Consumption Considerations
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.
•
7.4.3
Quad docking station – can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC.
Operator Controls
NEO docking stations have no operator controls or power switches.
7.5
Desktop Docking Station – PX3001
Figure 7.9 Desktop Docking Station
Spare Battery
Charge Well
Connector
Pins
Tri-coloured
LED
216
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Desktop Docking Station Setup
Note: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It is critical that it
be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The desktop docking station is designed to charge the battery installed in NEO along with a
spare battery pack. It is equipped with a micro-USB port.
Figure 7.10 Back of Desktop Docking Station
Micro-USB Port
DC IN Socket
Important: This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved
lithium-ion batteries.
7.5.1
Desktop Docking Station Setup
Refer to instruction sheet PN 1081333 for a checklist of startup steps. You can find this
instruction sheet on Teknet. Go to www.psionteklogix.com. Tap on Teknet and enter your
user name and password. If you’re not already a member, you will be asked to register free
of charge.
7.5.2
Charging a Battery Installed in NEO
Important: Before charging a battery, it is critical that you review the “NEO Hand-Held
Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000175.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
217
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging a Spare Battery
•
Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the
pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.
• Slide NEO into the docking station, making certain that the connector on the base of the
hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins. An icon is displayed
in the task bar at the bottom of the hand-held screen indicating that the unit is properly
installed in the station:
The LED on NEO lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging
will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use – the
battery will not be overcharged.
Note: To maintain NEO real time clock for three days, the battery must be charged for a
minimum of two hours (while installed in the hand-held).
7.5.3
Charging a Spare Battery
To charge a spare battery:
•
Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the docking station,
aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well.
Note: To maintain NEO real time clock for three days, a battery must be charged for at
least two hours while installed in the hand-held; however, if you are charging a
spare battery (not installed in the hand-held), the real time clock three day backup
cannot be maintained until a charged battery is installed in the hand-held computer
for at least two hours.
7.5.4
Battery Charge Duration
A NEO inserted in the desktop docking station requires 3 hours to charge the battery to
75% capacity.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on NEO default settings – i.e., display
brightness 50%, keyboard backlight off, 802.11b/g radio on and 23° C temperature.
Additional peripherals and other power consumption features will also alter the
specified charge time.
The desktop docking station stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged –
there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well.
218
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Docking Station Charger LED Indicators
7.5.5
Docking Station Charger LED Indicators
The desktop docking station is equipped with a single tri-coloured LED indicator in the
lower-right corner of the front panel that indicates various charge states of the spare battery
installed in the docking station.
Note: During the first two minutes of a battery charge, the LED remains solid yellow
while the hand-held computer status is assessed and the super capacitor is charged.
Table 7.3 Desktop Docking Station Charger LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
Charge Status
Off
No battery detected in the slot.
Solid Yellow
Battery charged to less than 75% of capacity.
Flashing Green
Battery charged to between 75% and 95% of capacity.
Solid Green
Charge complete.
Flashing Yellow
Battery is not charging. The battery temperature is outside of the
charge range of 0º C to 45º C.
Solid Red
Battery is not charging. Battery fault.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
7.5.6
Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Dock
7.5.6.1 Indicator Solid Red
If the indicator is solid red:
• Remove the battery and disconnect the mains power cable.
• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the charge well LED remains solid red, the battery may be defective or there is a power
supply problem.
7.5.6.2 NEO Power LED Does Not Light Up
•
•
•
Ensure NEO is fully seated in the dock.
Verify that there is power from the mains outlet.
Remove the power cable from the docking station, and check it for damage.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
219
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Linking a NEO to a PC
•
Reconnect the power cable to the outlet.
7.5.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
•
•
•
•
•
7.5.7
Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the charge well.
Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge well.
Inspect the charge well contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charge well.
Reconnect the power cable, and check that the charge well indicator flashes at powerup.
Linking a NEO to a PC
The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files or
install applications. A USB cable is included with your docking station.
Note: For information about data transfer with the Windows XP operating system and
ActiveSync or with the Vista operating system, refer to “Data Transfer Between the
PC & the Hand-Held” on page 20.
To link NEO to a PC:
•
•
7.5.8
Insert the hand-held in the desktop docking station.
Insert the micro-USB connector into the docking station connector. Attach the other end
of the cable into a USB port on the PC.
Linking NEO to an Ethernet Network
A micro-USB Ethernet adaptor cable – model number PX3052 – is used to connect NEO to
an Ethernet network through a desktop docking station.
•
•
Insert the micro-USB connector on the adaptor cable into the micro-USB port on the
back of the desktop docking station.
Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the adaptor cable.
7.5.8.1 Network Access
The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into the desktop dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the micro-USB Ethernet converters.
Network Addressing
The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a
specific NEO on the network.
220
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting USB Operations
If a link is established between NEO and a host, the application on the host and on the handheld must have a recovery mechanism in the event that NEO is removed from the dock, interrupting the link.
7.5.9
Troubleshooting USB Operations
•
•
•
7.6
Ensure that the unit is fully seated in the dock. A dock icon should be visible in the
task bar.
Ensure the USB cabling is connected properly.
Ensure NEO and docking station contacts are not contaminated.
AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PX3012
The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station allows you to operate your handheld using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions are shipped with the AC wall adaptor: United Kingdom, Australia, Europe and North America.
Universal AC Power Supply
DC Power Plug
Adaptor Plugs
•
•
•
Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug
into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled
together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the back of the charger.
Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
221
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056
7.7
Cigarette Lighter Adaptor — Model PX3056
The cigarette lighter adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery
using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction
with the DC/USB Adaptor, Model No. PX3054.
Figure 7.11 Automotive Power Adaptor
DC Power Plug
•
•
•
Automotive Power Adaptor Plug
Attach the micro-USB adaptor, model number PX3054, to the base of NEO. Refer to
“Micro-USB Adaptor – Model No. PX3054” on page 214 if you require further details.
The desktop docking station is also equipped with a DC IN socket to which you can
connect the automotive adaptor.
Insert the DC power plug on the automotive adaptor into the DC IN socket on the
Micro-USB adaptor or desktop docking station.
Insert the automotive power adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
7.8
222
Quad Docking Station – PX3004 PC & PX3004 NPC
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Quad Docking Station Setup
Note: The quad docking station is shipped with a user manual. It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The quad docking station permits each of the four docked NEOs to communicate with a
10/100 Base-T Ethernet network. It also provides sufficient power to operate the hand-helds
and charge their batteries.
Important: The Ethernet connection on the quad docking station is designed for indoor
use only!
7.8.1
Quad Docking Station Setup
Refer to instruction sheet PN 1081342 for a checklist of startup steps. You can find this
instruction sheet on Teknet. Go to www.psionteklogix.com. Tap on Teknet and enter your
user name and password. If you’re not already a member, you will be asked to register free
of charge.
7.8.2
Quad Docking Station Indicators
The quad dock is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic
indicator LEDs. When a valid link is established, a green LED is illuminated next to
the RJ45 connector.
7.8.3
Inserting a NEO in the Quad Docking Station
• Slide NEO into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched.
The LED on the hand-held unit lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.
Interaction with NEO while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software
used to communicate with the host network.
7.8.4
Network Access
The quad docking station has one 10/100 Ethernet port. You can insert up to four hand-held
units. The hand-helds are connected to an internal USB hub. The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into a quad docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to
communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
223
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour
7.8.4.1 Network Addressing
Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific hand-held. The host application uses
standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a specific NEO on
the network.
If a link is established between NEO and a host, the application on the host and on the handheld must have a recovery mechanism in the event that NEO is removed from the dock and
the link is interrupted.
7.8.5
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour
Charge status is displayed on the hand-held LED. Refer to Table 7.3 on page 219 for
detailed LED charge behaviour. When inserted in the quad dock, NEO requires 3 hours to
charge the battery to 75% capacity. Charge durations are independent of the number of
NEOs docked.
Note: The specified battery charge times are based on NEO being powered off. Additional
peripherals and other power consumption features will also alter the specified
charge time.
7.8.6
Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are
installed on NEO – no indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself.
7.8.6.1 Network Link Unsuccessful
If a network link fails, the application must take appropriate action.
7.8.6.2 NEO LED Does Not Light When Docked
•
•
•
•
•
•
224
Check that the quad docking station has power: Is the Power LED on the docking
station illuminated?
Try inserting NEO in another well in the quad dock.
Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of NEO. Wipe the
contacts with a damp cloth if necessary.
Check the connector pins inside the dock cradle for dirt. Gently wipe with a soft cloth if
they appear to be dirty or discoloured.
Check that the contacts are not bent or damaged.
Remove and reinsert NEO in the cradle.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Scanners and Imagers
•
7.9
Make certain that the battery installed in NEO is not defective.
Scanners and Imagers
NEO supports the following scanner and imagers: 1D laser scanner (SE955), 1D imager
(EV15) and 2D imager (HHP 5000). The scanner installed in your unit can be configured
using the Scanner Settings dialog box (see “Teklogix Scanners Settings” on page 156 and
Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings”) and the Manage Triggers application (see page 141).
If a 2D imager is installed in your unit, the imager can be configured using the Teklogix
Imager applet. For details, refer to “Teklogix Imagers Settings” on page 155 and
Appendix B: “Teklogix Imagers Applet”.
Important: It is critical that you review the “NEO Hand-Held Computer Regulatory &
Warranty Guide, PN 8000175, before proceeding.
7.9.1
Basic Scanner Operations
•
•
7.9.2
Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning
indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
Scanning Techniques
•
NEO’s unique ergonomic design allows you to hold the hand-held at a comfortable
angle while scanning.
• Ensure that the scanner beam is not perpendicular to the bar code. Light reflected
directly back into the scanner’s exit window may prevent a successful decode.
• Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D laser scanner, make certain that the scan
beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end
of the symbol.
• When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code.
Movement blurs the image.
• Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.
• Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the
onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, tap on
Start>Settings>System tab>Teklogix Scanners icon. Tap on the Options tab, and then tap on
Scan Indicator to turn this option off.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
225
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
When the scan is successful, the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan
button (or pistol trigger) is released, but only if Scan Result is turned on in the Options tab
discussed in the previous paragraph.
7.9.3
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.10
Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are
using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.
Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to
verify that the problem is not with the bar code.
Check that the bar code is within the specified decode zone. Refer to “Scanner/Imager
Specifications” on page 233 for details.
Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware
problem in the hand-held.
Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt, fogging or damage.
Bluetooth Peripherals
NEOs equipped with Bluetooth radios make it possible to communicate with a variety of
Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on.
The range of the Bluetooth radio is limited to approximately 10 meters.
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
• GSM/GPRS universal handset.
• Bluetooth printer.
• Bluetooth headset.
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band.
Although NEO includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will
not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in
the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously—this has a negative
impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction
rates (such as printers and scanners).
Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 177 for information about setting up your Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth
device to determine the method used to pair with NEO host.
226
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
8
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 NEO Hand-Held Specifications . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . .
8.1.4 Bar Code Applications . . . . . . . .
8.2 NEO Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 802.11b/g Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Scanner/Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 SE 955HP Specifications. . . . . . .
8.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone . .
8.3.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . .
8.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone .
8.3.3 HHP 5000 Imager Performance . . .
8.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.229
.229
.230
.231
.231
.232
.232
.232
.233
.233
.234
.234
.235
.235
.236
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
227
Chapter 8: Specifications
NEO Hand-Held Specifications
8.1
NEO Hand-Held Specifications
Note: Performance specifications are nominal & subject to change without notice.
8.1.1
Hardware
Physical Dimensions
•
168 mm x 64 mm x 34 mm (6.6 in. x 2.5 in. x 1.3 in.)
Weight (with battery pack)
•
275 g (0.6 lbs.)
User Interface
Colour Touchscreen Display:
•
•
•
•
•
6.86 cm (2.7 in.) diagonal in QVGA portrait mode
Sunlight readable transmissive with touchscreen
Colour 240 x 320 graphic TFT
Passive stylus or finger operation
LED backlit keyboard
Keyboard:
•
•
•
48-key Alpha Numeric
26-key Numeric
Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous, one-hand operation
Indicators & Controls:
•
Tri-coloured LED indicates battery charge and scan status
Audio:
•
•
•
Built-in microphone and receiver on all Connected hand-helds
85db internal beeper
Bluetooth (on equipped models)
Internal Expansion Slot
•
One microSD memory card slot – user accessible.
Expansion Port
•
Battery Power
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
229
Chapter 8: Specifications
Software
•
USB signalling
Docking Port
•
•
•
RS-232
USB
DC Input
Environmental Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8.1.2
Drop Test: 1.2 m (4 ft.) - 26 drops to polished concrete
Rain/Dust: IP54, IEC 529
Operating Temperature: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Storage Temperature: -20 ºC to +60 ºC (-4 ºF to 140 ºF)
Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
Storage Temperature: -20 °C to +60 °C (13 °F to 140 °F)
Shock and Vibration: Random vibration 1 m2/s3 @ 5 to 200 Hz, 0.5 m2/s3 @ 200-500
with duration of 100 min/axis, 3 axes and shock of 150 m/s2 @ 11ms and 300 m/s2 @
6ms.
ESD: ± 8kVdc air discharge, ± 4kVdc contacts
Software
Platform
•
•
PXA270 Processor @ 624 Mhz
Memory:
- On-board RAM: 128 MB SDRAM
- On-board ROM: 128 MB Flash
Operating System
•
Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic
Programming Environment
•
•
HTML, XML
Mobile Devices SDK:
- CE .NET SDK
- Java Visual C++
230
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
Wireless Communication
- Standard protocols APIs – Windows® sockets (WinCE)
Application Software
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8.1.3
Wireless Communication
•
•
8.1.4
Internet Explorer® 6
Office Mobile
ActiveSync
Open TekTerm
ANSI
TESS terminal emulations
IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392
MCC
Naurtech
Stay-Linked
PTX Connect
MCL
On-board IEEE 802.11b/g (CCX Certified)
On-board Bluetooth radio
Bar Code Applications
Note: All are user-upgradeable.
•
•
•
Optional 1D EV15 imager module.
Optional 1D SE955 laser scanner module
Optional 2D HHP 5000 imager module
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
231
Chapter 8: Specifications
NEO Radio Specifications
8.2
NEO Radio Specifications
8.2.1
802.11b/g Radio
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (OFDM)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Form factor: Embedded surface mount module, 8.2 x 8.4 mm
Antenna port: U.FL jack
Antenna Type: PCB slot antenna
Antenna Gain: 2dBi peak
Transmit Power: 802.11b/g: 50 mW typical (+17 dBm)
Frequency Range: 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz
Channels: This radio supports 802.11d. The radio will associate with any 802.11d compliant AP, regardless of what channel is in use.
RX Sensitivity:
-86 dBm typ @ 11 Mbps
-82dBm @ 6 Mbps, -69 dBm @ 54 Mbps
•
Data Rates:
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
•
EVM
802.11b: -28 dB typ (16%)
802.11g: -29 dB typ (13%)
•
8.2.2
Bluetooth Radio
•
•
•
•
•
232
Bluetooth Co-existence: 2-line hardware handshake with Bluetooth radio
Form Factor: Embedded (920 kbps serial interface)
Bluetooth Version: Version 2.0 compliant – features Adaptive Frequency Hopping
(AFH) for better co-existence with 802.11 radio and Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) for up
to 3 Mbps data rate
Antenna Type: Ceramic chip PIFA
Antenna Gain: 1 dBi peak
Transmit Power: -3 dBm (0.5mW) minimum, +4 dBm (2.5 mW) max
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
Scanner/Imager Specifications
•
•
•
Frequency Range: 2.400-2.4835 GHz
RX Sensitivity (BER<0.1%): -80 dBm max
Data Rate:
V1.2 = 732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric
V2.0 = 2 & 3Mbps
•
802.11 Co-existence: 2-line hardware handshake with 802.11 radio
8.3
Scanner/Imager Specifications
8.3.1
SE 955HP Specifications
Scan Angle
47° ± 3° default / 35° ± 3° reduced
Scan Rate
104 (± 12) scans/sec (bi-directional)
Scan Pattern
Linear
Wavelength
650nm
Input Voltage
3.0-5.5 VDC ± 10%
Input Current
65 mA typical
Standby Current
8 µA max
Operating Temperature
-20° to 60° C
-4° to 140°F
Print Contrast
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm
Dimensions
1.21 cm H x 2.16 cm W x 1.55 cm (max)
0.47 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D (max)
Symbologies
UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,
Codabar, MSI Plessey
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
233
Chapter 8: Specifications
EV15 Imager Specifications
8.3.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone
Decode Zone Typical
4 mil
1.0 in. – 5.5 in. / 2.54 cm – 13.97 cm
5 mil
1.25 in. – 8 in. / 3.18 cm – 20.32 cm
7.5 mil
1.5 in. – 13.25 in. / 3.81 cm – 33.66 cm
10 mil
1.5 in. – 17.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 44.45 cm
UPC 100%
1.5 in. – 23.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 59.69 cm
15 mil
1.5 in. – 29.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 74.93 cm
20 mil
1.75 in. – 35.5 in. / 4.45 cm – 90.17 cm
40 mil
* - 40 in. / * - 101.6 cm
55 mil
* - 55 in. / * - 139.7 cm
* dependent on width of bar code
8.3.2
EV15 Imager Specifications
Parameter
Light Source
Scan Angle
Minimum Print
Contrast
Min x. Dimension
Reading Distance
Symbologies
Ambient Light
Shock
Vibration
234
Specification
617nm Highly Visible LED
40º
Minimum 25%
0.1 mm (4 mils)
Up to 90cm (35 in)
UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128,
ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,
Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417,
Micro PDF417
Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
2000G, 0.7ms, half sinus, 3 axes
50G r.m.s
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
8.3.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone
0 Lux to 100,000 Lux
Minimum Range
Maximum Range
Inches
Inches
Mil Size
5
2.5
7
10
3
14
UPC
2
14.5
20
2.5
22
40
3
35.5
High quality symbols in normal room light.
8.3.3
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
Specification
HHP 5000
Image Sensor
752H x 480 CMOS sensor
Motion Tolerance
4 in. (10.2 cm) per second
Rotational Sensitivity
360°
Viewing Angle
±40°
Ambient light
Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)
Illumination LEDs
626 nm ±30 nm
Aiming
LEDs: 526 nm ±30 nm
Laser: 650 nm ±10 nm
Symbologies supported
2D: PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code,
Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite
Linear: Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2
of 5, RSS, Code 93, Codablock
Postal: Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post,
Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
235
Chapter 8: Specifications
HHP 5000 Imager Performance
Size
1.78 cm Depth x 2.79 cm Width (without mounting tabs) x 1.21
cm Height
0.7 in. Depth x 1.1 in. Width (without mounting tabs) x 0.475 in.
Height
Weight
5.9 grams (.21 ounces)
Operational Input Voltage
Imager: 3.3 VDC ±5% (23°C)
Illumination + Aimer 5300: 3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)
Operating Temperature
-30° to +50°C (-34° to 122°F)
Storage Temperature
-40° to +70°C (-40° to 158°F)
Humidity
up to 95% RH, non-condensing at 122° F (50°C)
Shock
18 shocks of 3,500 G for 0.5 msec at 23°C (73° F)
8.3.3.1 HHP 5000 Decode Zone
Performance Focal Point
SR
SR Working
Range
236
7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate
8.3 mil
Linear
10 mil
PDF417
13 mil UPC 15 mil Data
Matrix
(.033 cm)
(.038 cm)
(.02 cm)
(.025 cm)
Near
3.5 in.
(8.9 cm)
3.1 in.
(7.9 cm)
2.1 in.
(5.3cm)
2.3 in.
(5.8 cm)
2.1 in.
(7.9 cm)
2.0 in.
(5.1 cm)
Far
7.6 in.
(19.3cm)
9 in.
(22.9 cm)
13.2 in.
(33.5 cm)
10.2 in.
(25.9 cm)
8.8 in.
(22.4 cm)
13.0 in.
(33 cm)
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
(.038 cm)
15 mil QR 35 mil Maxicode
(.089 cm)
APPENDIX
A
PINOUTS
A.1
Docking Connector Pinout
PIN #
Signal Name
Function
1
DGND
Ground
2, 3, 4
VDD_EXT_POWER
Power Input (6 VDC, 2.8 A)
5
BATT_OUT
Not Connected
6
AUDIO_N
Not Connected
7
AUDIO_P
Not Connected
8
VBUS_5V
USB Vbus (5 V @ 500 mA)
9
DOCK_ID
Dock Identifier
10
USB_DOCK_D-
USB Data Negative
11
USB_DOCK_D+
USB Data Positive
12
USB_DOCK_ID
USB Identifier
13
DGND
Ground
14
TXD
RS-232 Transmit Console Data
15
RXD
RS-232 Receive Console Data
16
DGND
Ground
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
A-1
Appendix A: Pinouts
Battery Connector
A.2
Battery Connector
PIN #
A.3
Signal Name
1
B-
Battery Negative
2
DQ
Bi-directional data (DS2762)
3
TH (GND)
Ground
4
B+
Battery Positive
5
PS
Power Switch Sensor
-
POLARITY TAB
6
B-
Battery Negative
Expansion Port Pinout
PIN #
A-2
DESCRIPTION
Signal Name
Function
1, 2, 5, 13, 14, 15, 16
DGND
Power Ground
3
USB-
USB Device port negative data
4
USB+
USB Device port positive data
6
EXP-~TRIG
Pistol Grip Trigger signal
7
EXP_~DETECT
Detection of installed device
8, 9, 10, 11, 12
SW_VSYS_PWR
Power Output (2.7-4.2VDC, 1A peak,
500mAh nominal) switched
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
APPENDIX
B
TEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLET
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager
settings. The principal uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture
images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager
works. Refer to “Imager Demo” on page 89 for details.
B.1
Required Applets
In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers must be present in the Settings>System tab along with the Teklogix Imagers applet.
B.2
Presets
There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix
Imagers applet:
•
•
Use a predefined preset.
Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.
Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used
whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent
group of settings that are known to work together in the intended
environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.
A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture.
Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or
resume from suspend.
The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom
preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only
specified bar codes, read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading
unusual media.
Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-1
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Predefined Presets
• Imaging for photo capture.
• Imaging for bar code decoding.
• Symbology selection.
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected
active preset.
B.2.1
Predefined Presets
Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to
understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases, these predefined presets
are sufficient.
B.2.2
Bar Code Predefined Presets
These presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes. The
bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded.
The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images
are captured.
B.2.2.1
Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets
The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Factory Default
This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes.
My Default
This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset. For details about the
Symbology Settings menu, refer to “Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies” on page
B-16.
All
This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode.
Linear
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode.
B-2
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
Linear and PDF417
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can
decode.
Matrix
This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode.
Postal
This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.
B.2.3
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Low light
This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights
are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the
gain.
Low power
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the handheld.
Glossy surface
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to
read bar codes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.
B.2.4
Image Capture Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-3
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Motion
This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.
Low light near
This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes
the flash.
B.3
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
B.3.1
Configuring the Image Capture Presets
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the
Imaging tab.
The following screen is displayed:
Figure B.1 Imaging Tab
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified
as follows:
•
B-4
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
•
•
B.3.2
Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
•
•
B.3.3
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.1 on page B-4, the active preset is Low
light near. To set an active preset:
•
B.3.4
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
B.3.5
Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-5
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
In this example, the Low light near preset was chosen. A screen like the sample below
is displayed.
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed – for this example, the new preset is called Custom Low Light.;
the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.
B-6
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
B.3.6
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click
the parameter.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-7
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
B.3.7
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
B.4
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
•
•
B-8
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
Figure B.2 Bar Code Presets
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as
follows:
•
•
•
Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Presets” on page B-2.
Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.
Note: The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
B.4.1
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
•
•
B.4.2
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.2 on page page B-9, the active preset is
Defaults. To set an active preset:
•
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-9
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Viewing a Preset
B.4.3
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
B.4.4
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
B-10
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The custom preset is displayed – for this example, Custom Default. The new custom preset
appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.
B.4.5
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-11
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
•
•
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
B.4.6
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
B.4.7
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
B-12
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Setting the Active Preset
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
Figure B.3 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
B.4.8
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.2 on page B-9, the active preset is Defaults. To set an active preset:
•
B.4.9
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
•
Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-13
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
B.4.10 Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
•
•
B-14
Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
B.4.11 Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-15
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
B.4.12 Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
B.4.13 Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies
To view the Symbology Settings options:
B-16
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies
•
Tap on the Barcoding tab, tap on All and then double-tap the View button.
To edit a default preset, you must first activate it:
•
Tap on My Default, and tap on the Activate button – an A appears to the right of
My Default.
Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the bar codes the imager will read.
•
Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-17
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
•
Double-tap on the Edit button.
None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets are changed.
B.4.13.1 Symbology Settings
Note: For descriptions of the bar code symbologies, review “Bar Code Symbologies –
Descriptions” on page B-23.
B.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
To configure rules for manipulating bar code data:
•
•
B-18
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
B.4.14.1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting
The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To
change the settings for a symbology:
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that takes a single character:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-19
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. The following screen is displayed:
•
When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
B.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.
Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanners
applet are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place
affect both translation tables.
• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
B-20
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
•
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translation tab.
For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to the “Translations
Tab” on page 159.
B.4.16 Advanced Tab
B.4.16.1 File Locations for Captured Images
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.
To define the location where imager files will be stored:
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-21
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
•
Tap on the File Location button.
•
•
•
Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type.
Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.
When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.
B.4.16.2 Configuring Triggers
Viewing the Trigger Configuration
The trigger on NEO is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Teklogix Imagers
applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet.
•
B-22
In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
•
To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in
the checkbox next to Show all modules.
Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers
For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on
page 141.
B.5
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
To view all symbologies available for the imager:
•
Tap on the Barcoding tab, and tap on All.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-23
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Options
Note: Remember that if you want to edit the symbologies, the preset you want to
change must be active. Highlight the preset you want to edit, and tap on the
Activate button – an A is added at the far right of the preset. With the activated
preset highlighted, double-tap on the Edit button.
B.5.1
Options
Auto Retry On Failed Decode Enabled
Setting this parameter to on allows the imager to repeat the image capture attempt if the
initial attempt fails. The number of retries is dependent on the value assigned in the next parameter, Max Number of Auto Retry. If this parameter is set to off, the imager will only
attempt the image capture once.
Max Number of Auto Retry
The value assigned for this parameter governs the number of times the imager will attempt
to capture a bar code if the first attempt fails to a maximum of 99 times.
Decoder Timeout
This parameter determines the maximum time that the decoder will spend searching for a
bar code on a captured image. The value assigned here is dependent on the type of bar code
and quality of the image being captured. For example, the value may need to be increased to
compensate for larger bar codes with more data encoded or for poor quality images. On the
other hand, the value can be decreased for smaller, good quality images. The allowable
value ranges from 200 to 500 msec.
Single Target Mode Enabled
When this parameter is enabled, the decoder assumes that a single bar code exists in the
image and that it is located in the centre of the image.
Add AIM ID Prefix
The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar
code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of
the decoded bar code.
B.5.2
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on makes “Code 39” readable to the imager.
B-24
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Trioptic Code
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Start/Stop Strip
“Code 39” has start/stop patterns that can be output as ASCII characters in the output data.
When Start/Stop Strip is enabled, start/stop characters are not output.
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Code 39” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not
part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of
your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned off.
Check Char Strip
If this parameter is set to on, check characters – if present – are not output.
Concatenation
When Concatenation is set to on, all decoded “Code 39” symbols with a SPACE as the first
data character are concatenated to the internal buffer. Data from the last “Code 39” symbol
without a SPACE is added to the buffer as well, and the entire buffer will be output.
Pharmaceutical
This is a numeric (0-9) fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies. It is also referred to
as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 48.
B.5.3
Trioptic Code
Note: “Trioptic Code” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-25
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 128
Enable
Trioptic Code symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows
this type of symbology to be recognized.
B.5.4
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.
ISBT Concatenation
These codes are not concatenated by default. You need to set this parameter to on to send
concatenated code.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 80.
B.5.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
A Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the
Supplement code/Addenda.
B-26
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
EAN 8
ISBN Translate
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
B.5.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 8 bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
B.5.7
UPC-A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC-A”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit, if present, is stripped from the decoded bar code
data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-27
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
UPC-E Settings
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the UPC-A bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
B.5.8
UPC-E Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Expand
This parameter expands the UPC-E code to a 12 digit UPC-A format.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in
length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to on, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a
supplement.
B-28
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator is a space that is added between the UPC-E bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
B.5.9
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Extended Coupon Code
This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC-A/EAN-13 bar
codes that have addenda.
Note: The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on/off, depending on the desired behavior.
B.5.10 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 0 to 80.
B.5.11 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Strip
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:
a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Setting this parameter to on strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-29
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
MSI Plessey
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Codabar” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not
part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of
your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned off.
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Concatenation
“Codabar” supports symbol concatenation. When Concatenation is set to on, Codabar uses a
‘D’ stop character to indicate that data from that symbol should be concatenated with data
from the adjacent symbol with a ‘D’ start character.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 60.
B.5.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable MSI.
Enable Plessey
Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to on, the integrity of a “MSI Plessey” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.
Plessey Minimum and Plessey Maximum Length
These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes.The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on
B-30
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 11
these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 48.
B.5.13 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One Check
Digit or Two check digits.
If this parameter is set to One Check Digit, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If
it is set to Two Check Digits, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 80.
B.5.14 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to on, the integrity of a “Interleaved 2 of 5” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 80.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-31
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Matrix 2 of 5
B.5.15 Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 80.
B.5.16 IATA 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “IATA 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 48.
B.5.17 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 48.
B.5.18 Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.
Enable AIM Output
If you set Enable AIM Output to on, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and
decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1). If you set this parameter to off,
B-32
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
GS1 DataBar
the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric
with optional full ASCII (start/stop pattern 2).
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 60.
B.5.19 GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar
Set this parameter to on to enable the imager to read “GS1 Databar” symbols.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 4 to 74.
B.5.20 Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Posi Code” scanning capability.
Enable Limited A and Enable Limited B
“Posi Code” is a “position” based symbology. A position based symbology de-couples the
widths of the bars from their positions. The centers of the bars are specified to be laid out on
a grid of equally spaced parallel lines. The distance between these grid lines is called the Gdimension and is analogous to the X-dimension of conventional bar codes.
There are two variations of this code: Posi Code A, and Posi Code B.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 2 to 80.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-33
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Composite
B.5.21 Composite
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled.
B.5.22 TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code.
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
B.5.23 2D PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 2750.
B.5.24 2D Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Micro PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 366.
B.5.25 Code 16K
The “Code 16K” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128. It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns. Up to 77
B-34
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Code 49
full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded into 2 to 16 rows. Each row
is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that
extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 16K”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 160.
B.5.26 Code 49
The “Code 49” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character
set below ASCII 128. Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric characters can be
encoded into two to eight rows. Each row is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom
of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 49”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 81.
B.5.27 Codablock
Enable
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 2048.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-35
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
2D Data Matrix
B.5.28 2D Data Matrix
Enable
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Data Matrix”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 1500.
B.5.29 2D QR Code
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 3500.
B.5.30 2D Maxicode
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Maxicode”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 150.
B.5.31 2D Aztec
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Aztec”.
Aztec Runes
Aztec Runes, the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol, has the ability to encode a very short
license plate message.
B-36
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Postal: PlaNET
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you
can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths – 1 to 3750.
B.5.32 Postal: PlaNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
B.5.33 Postal: PostNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
B.5.34 Postal: Australian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.
B.5.35 Postal: Canadian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Canadian”.
B.5.36 Postal: China
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: China”.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
B-37
Appendix B: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Postal: Japanese
B.5.37 Postal: Japanese
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.
B.5.38 Postal: Kix
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Kix”.
B.5.39 Postal: Korean
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.
B.5.40 Postal: Royal
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.
B.5.41 VeriCode®
Enabled
VeriCode® is a 2D omni-directional symbol. To read this symbol, set this parameter to on.
B-38
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
APPENDIX
C
BAR CODE SETTINGS
C.1
Scanner Menu
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from
one of the following scanner types used with NEO: Decoded (internal) or
Decoded (Intermec ISCP).
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes
it supports.
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those
codes that are required by the application.
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal
imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the
Barcode dialog boxes.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-1
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanner
C.2
Decoded (Internal) Scanner
C.2.1
Options – Decoded (Internal) Scanner
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you doubletap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec,
200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the
scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value
between 5 and 99, measured in tenths of a second.
C.2.2
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
Scan Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
scanning mode: Scan beam only, Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull, Aim with Scan: 2 trigger
pulls, Aim with Scan on trigger release, and Continuous Scan Mode.
C-2
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which
you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming dot.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
Power Mode
This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power
mode options: Continuous Power and Low Power.
In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or a serial
communication.
In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger
pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable
for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to
scan a bar code.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
NEO is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ enables decoding of parameter bar codes.
Linear Security Level
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality.
There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-3
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 4.
“Linear security level 1” specifies that the following code types must be successfully read
twice before being decoded:
Code Type
Length
Codabar
All
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 5 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
“Linear security level 2” specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice
before being decoded.
“Linear security level 3” specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type
Length
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 2 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
“Linear security level 4” requires that all code types be successfully read three times before
being decoded.
Bi-Direction Redundancy
Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.
When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions
(forward and reverse) before being decoded.
C-4
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
C.2.3
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Scanning Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose
one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster, Programmable Raster,
Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern or Semi-Omni Pattern.
Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate
These parameters determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.
Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or
Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster
Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended for very specific applications
and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 15.
C.2.4
Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character
prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the
decoded symbol.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
transmit code: None, AIM or Symbol.
Scan Data Format
This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on
“Scan Data Format” displays the following options from which you can choose a data
format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2]
and [P] data [S1][S2].
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.
When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter
a value from 0 to 255.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-5
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Delete Char Set ECIs
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing
Character Set ECIs – Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as GLIs) from its buffer
before transmission.
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417
bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.
ECI Decoder
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were
not encoded using ECIs.
If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned,
the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.
C.2.5
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ enables “Code 39”.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The
scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows
this type of symbology to be recognized.
Convert To Code 32
Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code 39”
to “Code 32”.
Code 32 Prefix
Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
C-6
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32”
bar codes.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 1 to 55.
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when
this parameter is enabled.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-7
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the “Decode Performance Level” parameter.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
The parameters in this sub-menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be
decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size parameters (see below). The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if
the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows:
•
•
•
Strip the leading and trailing characters.
Add the prefix and suffix characters.
Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if
the length falls between the minimum and maximum size.
Field Size
When a value is assigned for this parameter, only bar codes that match the field size exactly
can be transmitted. If a value is assigned to this parameter, a Minimum Size and Maximum
Size value is not required.
Minimum Size And Maximum Size
When a value is assigned to these parameters, only bar code lengths that fall between the
minimum and maximum value can be decoded. If values are assigned to these parameters, a
Field Size value is not required.
C-8
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
Add/Remove Data
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key
you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key
value of the keypress is displayed.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you
want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of
the keypress is displayed.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
C.2.6
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.
Enable GS1-128/GS1 US
Previously UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators and start
codes.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this variation, “Enable ISBT 128” must be set to on.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is set to ‘on’, one of three decode levels assigned to the “Decode Performance Level” parameter can be selected.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-9
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
EAN 13
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.7
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.8
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
EAN-8 Zero Extend
When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols,
making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns
EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C-10
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC A
C.2.9
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.
UPC-A Check Digit
If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
UPC-A Preamble
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one
of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country code and System Char –
both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the data or
None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.10
UPC E
Enabled UPC-E
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
UPC-E and UPC-E1 Check Digit
If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
UPC-E And UPC-E1 Preamble
When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can
choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmitted to the host device: System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country
code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are
transmitted with the data or None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are
considered part of the symbol.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-11
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Conv. UPC-E1 to UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.11
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes.
Enable Bookland EAN
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ allows your scanner to recognize “Bookland EAN” bar codes.
Supplementals
“Supplementals” are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).
Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is
decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN
symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the
“Supp. Redundancy” parameter.
Supp. Redundancy
With Autodiscriminate selected in the “Supplementals” parameter, “Supp. Redundancy”
adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
value between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is
selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.
Security Level
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level
from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the
time it takes to decode the bar code.
C-12
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 93
Linear Decode
“Linear Decode” applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN8, EAN-13). When enabled (set to on), a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and
right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled
when bar codes are in proximity to each other.
2D UPC Half Block Stitching
Setting this parameter to on enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for the SE 3223 omnidirectional engine only.
C.2.12
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93” or off to disable it.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 4 to 55.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.13
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable “Codabar”.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-13
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
MSI Plessey
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 5 to 55.
CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the
first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol.
Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar
symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.14
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI Plessey”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
C-14
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 6 to 55.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or
Two check digit(s).
If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check
Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm” must also
be selected. See below for details.
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Check Digit Algorithm
When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification is required to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which
you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or MOD 10/MOD 10.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.15
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-15
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Discrete 2 of 5
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 4 to 14.
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to
ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Convert to EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.16
Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
C-16
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
GS1 DataBar
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that
may be decoded. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 1 to 12.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.17 GS1 DataBar
All GS1 DataBar bar codes encode a GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 in a 14-digit data structure. In
order to make the GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 a 14-digit data structure, a leading zero or zeros is
filled to the left of the GTIN.
Enable GS1 DataBar Omni, Expanded & Limited
GS1 DataBar Omni and GS1 DataBar Expanded have omnidirectional scanning capability.
GS1 DataBar Limited can only be scanned by a linear hand-held scanning device. They
cannot be scanned by omnidirectional scanners. Each of these options can be turned on or
off depending on the scanner installed in your hand-held.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.18
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-17
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
PDF-417
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite
symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Enable TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
C.2.19
PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.20
Micro PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417
is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but
lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
C-18
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (ISCP)
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3
Decoded (ISCP)
•
C.3.1
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).
Options – Decoded Scanner
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the
scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value
between 1 and 10 seconds.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-19
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner
C.3.2
Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the
scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
NEO is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to ‘Enabled’ allows decoding of parameter bar codes.
Same Read Validate
The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at
this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times.
Same Read Timeout
Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned determines
after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Diff Read Timeout
Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
C-20
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 39
Add AIM ID Prefix
The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar
code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of
the decoded bar code.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which
you can enter a value from 0 to 2550 milliseconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming
dot.
C.3.3
Code 39
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Start/Stop Transmit
Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are
usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $ character (see also
next parameter, “Accepted Start Char”).
Accepted Start Char
This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or
both ($ char, * char, $ and * char).
Check Digit Verification
Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the
symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not
transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP, or Italian CIP.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-21
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a
standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.4
Code 128
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.
GS1-128
“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former
correct name was UCC/EAN-128.
GS1-128 Identifier
“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID " ]C1" for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed.
By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to
read normal EAN 128 Codes.
C-22
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 128
FNC1 Conversion
“FNC1 Conversion” allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to another character for applications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator or hex (1d).
Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range – 0 to 255.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this
option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deactivated to avoid any confusion.
ISBT Concat Transmit
The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided
for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits
only concatenated codes—single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing Concatenated or
Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that
code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be
concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair (see below) is enabled.
ISBT Concat Any Pair
Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do
not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Specification for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter uses the
specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data
before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-23
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
EAN 13
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
ISBN Conversion
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C-24
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPCA
C.3.7
UPCA
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert to EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.8
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Enable UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert to UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections (e.g. Check Digit).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-25
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
UPC/EAN Shared
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.9
UPC/EAN Shared
The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is shared
across all UPC and EAN bar codes.
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter
provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted.
• Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.
When “Addendum” is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner searches for
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an
addendum.
Addendum Add-on 2 and Addendum Add-on 5
Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or
5 characters.
Addendum Security
If you tap on “Addendum Security”, a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the
security level of add-on 2 or add-on 5 with a value from 0 to 100. As security levels increase, the scanner decode speed decreases.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to
read normal EAN 128 Codes.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
C-26
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 93
C.3.10
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable “Code 93”.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.11
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Transmit
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:
a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of
those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting
this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
CLSI Library System
When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in
the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-27
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
MSI Plessey
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a
specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical
Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.12
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI”.
Enable Plessy
Set this parameter to on to enable “Plessy”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.
This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the
data is not transmitted.
C-28
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Code 11
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Plessy Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Plessy Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code
refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.13
Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10
Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the
integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm,
the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-29
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.14
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French CIP.
“Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to
ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that
algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
C-30
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Matrix 2 of 5
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.15
Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Standard 2 of 5 Format
This parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identic on (6 start/stop bars)
or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. “Check Digit
Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity
of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is
not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-31
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Telepen
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.17
Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.
Format
This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII
or Numeric.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.18 GS1 DataBar
All GS1 DataBar bar codes encode a GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 in a 14-digit data structure. In
order to make the GTIN-12 or GTIN-13 a 14-digit data structure, a leading zero or zeros is
filled to the left of the GTIN.
Enable GS1 DataBar Omni, Expanded & Limited
GS1 DataBar Omni and GS1 DataBar Expanded have omnidirectional scanning capability.
GS1 DataBar Limited can only be scanned by a linear hand-held scanning device. They
C-32
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Composite
cannot be scanned by omnidirectional scanners. Each of these options can be turned on or
off depending on the scanner installed in your hand-held.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.19
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a
composite symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Linear Transmission Only
When ‘Linear Transmission Only’ is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite
bar code is transmitted when scanned.
UPC-EAN Composite Message
This option allows you to choose how UPC-EAN shared bar codes are transmitted: Always
Linked, Never Linked or Auto-discriminate.
C.3.20
TLC-39
Enable
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol.
Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-33
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
PDF-417
Linear Transmission Only
When “Linear Transmission Only” is enabled, only the linear portion of the composite bar
code is transmitted when scanned.
Security Level
This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC-39 and standard Code 39. Tapping on
“Security Level” displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100. The
higher the value assigned, the lower the decode rate.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.21
PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.22
Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
C-34
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Codablock
]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.23
Codablock
Enable Codablock A
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type A”.
Enable Codablock F
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type F”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
C-35
INDEX
A
About Device icon 131
About icon (software version) 131
Accepted Start Char C-21
accessories
desktop docking station 216
Ethernet adaptor cable 220
hand strap 205
quad docking station 222
ActiveSync 21, 79
setting up 79
Adaptor
Cable/Dongle Micro-USB to Ethernet
(Model No. PX3052) 212
Cable Micro-USB to USB A Receptacle
(Model No. PX3058) 212
Micro-USB with DC Jack (Model No.
3054) 214
RS232 (Model No. PX3050) 212
adaptor cable
USB-Ethernet 220
Addendum C-26
Addendum Add-on 2 C-26
Addendum Add-on 5 C-26
Addendum Security C-26
Add Remove Data (bar code scanning)
C-9
Prefix C-9
Strip Leading C-9
Suffix Char C-9
Aim Duration D-3, D-21
aiming dot, duration of C-2
alarm, setting 53
alarms, setting 136
aligning touchscreen 37
All
Predefined preset B-2
alpha keys, accessing 35
ALT Key 33
appending to bar codes
characters 158
App Launch icon 110
ASCII
Full Ascii C-21
audio indicators
beep conditions 39
volume adjustment 39
B
backlight
Battery Power tab 132
External Power tab 133
intensity 36
Intensity tab 133
backup battery 11
backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 163
backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)
166
backup profile, viewing (Total Recall) 167
Bad Scan Beep 158
Bar code
Decoding symbology predefined
presets B-2
bar code
appending to 158
Decoded C-2
displaying type of bar code 158
Options tab 157
symbologies
Codabar B-29, C-13, C-27
Code 11 B-31, C-29
Code 128 C-9
Code 93 B-29, C-13, C-27
Discrete 2 of 5 B-32, C-16, C-31
EAN 13 C-10, C-24
EAN 8 C-10, C-24
IATA 2 of 5 B-32
Interleaved 2 of 5 B-31, C-15, C-30
Matrix 2 of 5 B-32, C-31
MSI Plessey B-30, C-14, C-28
UPC A B-27, C-11, C-25
UPC E B-28, C-11, C-25
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
I
Index
Translation tab 159
bar code reader
integrated scanner, operation of 225
batteries
a description of 211
backup 11
battery cover, standard version 11
Battery Details tab 148
battery hotkey 53
Battery info. tab 147
battery power, managing 146
Battery Power tab 132
battery settings 147
charging 11
installing 28
installing main battery 11
main battery 11
pinouts A-2
removing 28
run time 40
storing 40
swap time 29
battery
charging 29
battery cover, standard version 11
battery power, managing 146
Baud Rate (modem setup) 188
beeper
beep conditions 39
volume adjustment 39
Bi-Direction Redundancy C-4
BKSP (DEL Key) 33
Block Recognizer 73
Bluetooth 41
pairing devices 42
Bluetooth devices, pairing 182
Bluetooth radio
ISM band 177
Bluetooth setup
peripherals 226
Bluetooth setup 177
Device tab 180
GPRS setup 186
Mode tab 185
Paired tab 178
Servers tab 184
Bluetooth specs 232
BooSt menu, accessing 23
boot (reset) 23
II
Built-in Devices tab 149
Buttons icon 112
C
cable diagrams A-1
calculator 80
calendar 59
categories, using 61
creating & editing entries 59
deleting appointments 62
reminders, creating 60
calibrating touchscreen 37
Call Options (modem setup) 189
Card Slots tab (Power) 149
certificates 134
charger
descriptions of 30
chargers 215
desktop docking station 216
installing at a site 216
operator controls 216
charging (main battery) 11
check digit C-15
Check Digit, One C-15
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) C-15
Check Digit Strip B-26
Check Digit Verification C-7, C-21,
C-23, C-28, C-29, C-30, C-31
Check Digit Verification (Codabar)
C-28
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) C-16
cleaning hand-held 47
Click Data (scanner double-click) 158
Click Time (scanner double-click)
157
clock, setting 53, 136
CLSI Editing C-14
CLSI Library System C-27
Codabar B-29, C-13, C-27
Codabar C-13
Codablock B-35, C-35
Code Page
Default Local ASCII 159
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1) 159
code page (Data Handling) 159
Code 11 B-31, C-29
Code 128 C-9, C-22
Code 128 Emulation C-18, C-34
Code 16K B-34
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Index
Code 32, Convert To C-6
Code 32 Prefix C-6
Code 39 C-6, C-21
Code 49 B-35
Code 93 B-29, C-13, C-27
Code 93 C-13
cold reset to OS (bypass BooSt) 23
communication
ActiveSync 21, 79
data transfer 20
Ethernet connection (desktop dock)
220
Ethernet connection (quad dock) 223
NEO to PC 12, 220
Vista 21
Composite B-34, C-17, C-33
Concatenation B-25, B-30
configuring IEEE 802.11 radio 12
connecting to a server with 101
connection, cancelling (modem) 189
Connection Properties (serial modem) 187
Connections 174
editing settings 197
Internet 189
managing 197
modem setup 190
network, selecting 199
network cards, setting up 195
Proxy Server setup 200
VPN, setting up 196
connections
managing 196
Connections (Internet) 189
connectivity hotkey 52
Continuous Scan Mode C-20
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A C-12
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A C-12
Convert To Code 32 C-6
Convert To EAN 13 C-16, C-24, C-25
Convert To UPC -A C-25
Copyright information, operating system
131
credit card, wait for (modem setup) 189
CTRL Key 33
Custom preset B-1
D
Data Bits (modem setup) 188
data entry modes
handwriting 87
typing 87
Data Handling (code page) 159
Data Matrix, 2D B-36
date, setting 53
debug (error handling) 136
Decoded (Internal) Scanner C-2
Decoded (internal) scanner parameters C-2
Decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters
C-19
decoded scanner C-2
Decode Performance C-8, C-9
Decode Performance Level C-8, C-10
Decoding symbology
Predefined symbology B-2
Default
Predefined preset B-2, B-3, B-4
Default identifier
Preset group B-2
Default Local ASCII (Code Page) 159
DEL (BKSP) Key 33
Delete Char Set ECIs C-6
desktop docking station (WA4002) 216
desktop screen (Today’s Screen) 51
Device ID tab 131
Device tab (Bluetooth) 180
Dial-String Commands (modem setup)
189
Dial Tone, wait for (modem setup) 189
Diff Read Timeout C-20
digit
check digit C-15
Discrete 2 of 5 B-32, C-16, C-31
Discrete 2 of 5 C-16
display
backlight, adjusting 36
docking station
uploading data using 41
docking stations 215
desktop docking station 216
installation at site 216
operator controls 216
quad dock 222
Dot Time C-2
double-click
appending characters to a decoded
bar code 158
scanner trigger 157
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
III
Index
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu
142
Dr. Debug 136
E
EAN 13 C-10, C-24
EAN 8 C-10, C-24
EAN-8 Zero Extend C-10
ECI Decoder C-6
email notification 56
Enable AIM Output (Telepen) B-32
Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN) C-12
Enable CC-AB C-18, C-33
Enable CC-C C-18, C-33
Enable Plessy C-28
Enable TLC-39 C-18
Error Reporting 139
ESC Key 33
Ethernet card See Network Card 195
EV15 1D imager scanner specifications
234
Excel Mobile 80
External GPS 139
External Power tab 133
F
features, NEO 4
Field Size C-8
file, renaming 65
File Explorer 64, 88
copy 65
copying a file 65
deleting file 65
folders, creating 65
renaming file 65
files & folders, managing 64
find (search) 102
flight mode (disabling the WLAN
connection) 194
FNC1 Conversion C-23
folder, copying 65
folder, creating 65
folder, deleting 65
folder, renaming 65
Full Ascii C-21
Full ASCII (decoded scanner) C-8
Function keys 34
IV
G
Games 79
Glossy surface
Predefined preset B-3
Good Scan Beep 158
GPRS (bluetooth) 186
GPS (external) 139
GS1 DataBar B-33, B-17, B-32
GS1-128 GS1 US C-9
GS1-128 Identifier C-22
GTIN Compliant C-22, C-26
H
hand strap 205
hardware, description of 131
headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 42, 182
Help 71
HHP 5000 imager specs 235
I
IATA 2 of 5 B-32
Identifier
Default preset group B-2
IEEE radio, configuring 12
Imager
EV15 specifications 234
HHP 5000 specs 235
Imager Applet B-1
imager options 225
Imager Settings 155
indicators
LED functions 38
scanner message 225
softkey bar 67
inking settings 123
Input Methods 121
Block Recognizer 73, 121
Input Method tab 121
Keyboard Options 122
Letter Recognizer 75, 122
soft keyboard 72
Transcriber 72
Transcriber options 123
input modes
handwriting 87
typing 87
integrated scanner option 225
Intensity tab (backlight) 133
Interleaved 2 of 5 B-31, C-15, C-30
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Index
internal scanner, decoded C-2
Internet connection 189
Internet Explorer 97
browsing web sites 97
Internet Sharing 89
IP Address, assigning 19
ISBN Conversion B-27, C-24
ISBT Concat Any Pair C-23
ISBT Concatenation B-26
ISBT Concat Transmit C-23
ISBT 128 C-9, C-23
ISM band, Bluetooth radio 177
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 (code page) 159
K
keyboard
alpha keyboard 35
one shot mode 113
options 122
Scancode remapping 117
Unicode Mapping 116
keyboard, soft (onscreen) 72
keyboard keys 33, 35
ALT 33
BKSP 33
CTRL 33
DEL 33
ESC 33
Macro keys 35, 114
modifier keys, locking & unlocking 32
modifiers 31
one shot mode 113
punctuation, accessing 33
SCAN 34
Scancode Remapping 117
shift-state indicator icon 31, 32, 67
SPACE 34
Unicode Mapping 116
L
landscape orientation 38
Laser On Time C-2, C-19
LED
functions 38
Length Mode C-28, C-30, C-32
Length Restriction (bar code scanning)
C-8
Field Size C-8
Maximum Size C-8
Minimum Size C-8
Letter Recognizer 75
Letter Recognizer options (Input Methods
tab) 122
Linear
Predefined preset B-2
Linear and PDF
Predefined preset B-3
Linear Decode C-13
Linear Security Level C-3
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) C-33
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
C-34
linking hand-held to PC 12, 20
Lock Sequence 120
Low light
Predefined preset B-3
Low power
Predefined preset B-3
Low Power Timeout C-3, C-20
L1, Set Length C-7
L2, Set Length C-7
M
Macro keys 35
deleting a macro 115
executing a macro 115
Macros menu, accessing 114
recording and saving 114
maintenance (of hand-held) 47
Mandatory Enabled B-26
mapping
Scancode 117
Unicode 116
Marvell Radio
Advanced tab 20
Authentication modes 15
Configuration tab 14
configuring 12
EAP types 16
Encryption 17
IP address 19
Name Servers 19
Status tab 13
Matrix
Predefined preset B-3
Matrix 2 of 5 B-32, C-31
Maximum Length B-25, B-26
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
V
Index
Maximum Size C-8
Memory
amount available 145
Storage Card tab 146
menus
pop-up 66
using 66
messages
Scan Indicator 158
scanner warning message 158
Scan Result 158
Messaging 98
folders 98
Outlook email, synchronizing 99
Micro PDF-417 B-34, C-18, C-34
Micro-SD Card, inserting 45
Micro-USB with DC Jack Adaptor (Model
No. 3054) 214
Minimum Cancel Time C-3, C-20
Minimum Length B-25, B-26, C-22,
C-23, C-27, C-29, C-31, C-32
Minimum Size C-8
Mode, Bluetooth 185
modem setup 190
Baud Rate 188
Call Options 189
Cancel If Not Connected 189
Data Bits 188
Dial-String Commands 189
Parity 188
Port Settings 188
Server Settings 193
Stop Bits 188
TCP_IP Settings 193
Wait For Credit Card 189
Wait For Dial Tone 189
modifier keys 31
locking & unlocking 31
One Shot Mode 113
shift-state indicator icon 31, 67
Motion
Predefined preset B-4
MSI Plessey B-30, C-14, C-28
N
name, assigning to NEO 131
navigation bar 52
Battery hotkey 53
connectivity hotkey 52
VI
Start button 52
volume control 53
network, selecting 199
network card
settings, changing 196
setting up 195
New menu, customizing 63
Note
creating 91
recording a message (audio) 93
renaming 93
synchronizing 95
text, converting handwriting into 92
Notes 91
Notification, setting 128
NOTIS Editing C-14
Number System B-27
O
Off & On buttons 30
On & Off button 30
One Check Digit C-15
one dimensional internal scanner 225
One Shot Mode 113
One Shot tab (modifier keys) 113
onscreen (soft) keyboard 72
Options tab (bar codes) 157
orientation, screen 38
Outlook email, synchronizing (Messaging)
99
Owner Information 127
ownership information, defining 55
P
Paired tab (Bluetooth) 178
pairing Bluetooth devices 182
Parameter Scanning C-3, C-20, C-21,
C-22, C-23, C-26, C-27, C-29, C-30,
C-31, C-32
Parity (modem setup) 188
PC, connecting NEO to 220
PC, linking to NEO 12
PDF and linear
Predefined preset B-3
PDF-417 C-18, C-34
Pharmaceutical B-25
Pictures
deleting 96
editing 96
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Index
opening 96
slide show, creating 96
Pictures and Videos 95
pinouts A-1
Plessey Maximum Length B-30
Plessey Minimum Length B-30
Plessy Transmit Check Digit C-29
Pocket Excel
workbook components 81
Pocket Word 86
port pinouts A-1
portrait orientation 38
Port Settings (modem setup) 188
Posi Code B-33
Postal
Predefined preset B-3
Postal
Australian B-37
Canadian B-37
China B-37
Japanese B-38
Kix B-38
Korean B-38
PlaNET B-37
PostNET B-37
Royal B-38
Power 146
Advanced battery settings 147
Battery Details tab 148
Battery tab 147
Built-in Devices tab 149
Card Slots tab 149
On Battery Power 147
On External Power 147
Suspend Threshold 150
Power button 11
powering up 11
Power Mode Decoded (Internal)
Scanner C-3
Predefined preset B-1
All B-2
Default B-2, B-3, B-4
Glossy surface B-3
Linear B-2
Linear and PDF B-3
Low light B-3
Low power B-3
Matrix B-3
Motion B-4
Postal B-3
Predefined presets B-2
Prefix C-5, C-9
Preset
Custom B-1
Group B-1
Group default identifier B-2
Predefined B-1, B-2
Preset group
Default identifier B-2
profile, creating backup 163
profile, restoring backup 166
profile, viewing backup 167
Programs 69, 79
closing 69
minimizing 69
opening 69
properties, NEO 131
proxy server, setting up 200
Q
quad dock (WA4204-G2) 222
R
radio
Bluetooth specs 232
configuring 12
specifications 232
radio specifications 232
Raster Expand Rate (2D) C-5
Raster Height (2D) C-5
Reading Range C-21, C-23, C-26, C-30
reboot (reset) 23
Regional Settings 151
remapping
Scancode 117
Unicode 116
Remote Desktop Mobile 101
Remove Programs 152
reset 23
resetting NEO
cold reset 23
reset 23
RS232 Adaptor (Model No. PX3050) 212
S
Same Read Timeout C-20
Same Read Validate C-20
Scancode remapping 117
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
VII
Index
Scan Data Format C-5
Scan Indicator 158
SCAN Key 34
Scan Log File 159
Scan Mode 2
scanner
module (SE955) specifications 233
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
225
options 225
techniques (scanning) 225
troubleshooting tips 226
Scanner Settings 156
scanning
Aim Duration D-3, D-21
aiming (target) dot duration C-2
appending characters 158
Bad Scan Beep 158
bar code setting 156
check digit C-15
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) C-15
Check Digit Verification C-7
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)
C-16
Click Data (appending data) 158
Click Time 157
CLSI Editing C-14
Codabar C-13
Code 128 C-9, C-22
Code 128 Emulation C-18
Code 32 Prefix C-6
Code 39 C-6, C-21
Code 93 C-13
Composite C-17, C-33
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A C-12
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A C-12
Convert To Code 32 C-6
Convert To EAN 13 C-16
Data Handling (code page) 159
Decoded (internal) C-2
Decoded Intermec (ISCP) C-19
Decode Perf. Level C-8, C-10
Decode Performance C-8, C-9
Delete Char Set ECIs C-6
Discrete 2 of 5 C-16
Dot Time C-2
double-click 157
EAN-8 Zero Extend C-10
ECI Decoder C-6
Enable Bookland C-12
VIII
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
Enable CC-AB C-18, C-33
Enable CC-C C-18, C-33
Enable TLC-39 C-18
Full ASCII C-8
Good Scan Beep 158
Laser On Time C-2, C-19
Linear Decode C-13
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) C-33
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
C-34
Micro PDF-417 C-18
NOTIS Editing C-14
Options tab 157
PDF-417 C-18
Prefix C-5
Scan Data Format C-5
Scan Indicator 158
Scan Log File 159
Scan Mode 2
Scan Result 158
Scan Result Time 158
Security Level C-12
Security Level (TLC-39) C-34
Set Length L1 C-7
Set Length L2 C-7
Suffix C-5
Supp. Redundancy C-12
Supplementals C-12
target (aiming) dot duration C-2
TLC-39 C-33
Translations tab 159
Transmit Check Digit C-7
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) C-16
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
C-15
Transmit Code 1D Char C-5
Trioptic Code, Enable B-25
Trioptic Code 39, Enable C-6
UPC-A Check Digit C-11
UPC-A Preamble C-11
UPC-EAN C-12
UPC-EAN Shared Settings B-29,
C-26
UPC-E Check Digit C-11
UPC-E Preamble C-11
UPC-E1 Check Digit C-11
UPC-E1 Preamble C-11
1D internal 225
2D UPC Half Block Stitching C-13
Index
Scanning Mode (2D) C-5
Scan Result 158
Scan Result Time 158
screen
navigating 51
stylus 51
touch pen 51
scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab)
112
Search (find) 102
Security Level C-12
Security Level (TLC-39) C-34
serial modem setup See Connection
Properties 187
Server Settings (modem setup) 193
Server tab (Bluetooth) 184
Set Length L1 C-7
Set Length L2 C-7
Settings 70, 109
App Launch 110
Buttons 112
Personal Tab 109
App Launch icon 110
Buttons icon 112
One Shot tab 113
Up_Down tab 112
SE955 scanner specifications 233
shift-state indicator, accessing 67
shift-state indicator (softkey bar) 67
shift-state indicator icon 32
SIM card, inserting 45
softkey (softkey bar) 67
softkey bar
shift-state indicator 67
softkey 67
soft keyboard icon 67
softkeys 67
soft keyboard (onscreen) 72
soft keyboard icon (softkey bar) 67
softkeys (softkey bar) 67
Soft Scan Timeout 158
Sound, setting events 128
Sound settings 128
SPACE Key 34
specifications
SE955 scanner 233
802.11b/g WLAN radio 232
Start/Stop Transmit C-21, C-27
Start button 52
Start Menu 63
customising 63
customizing 127
Stop 188
Stop Bits (modem setup) 188
Storage Card tab 146
Strip Leading C-9
Strip Trailing C-9
stylus (touch pen), using 51
Suffix C-5
Suffix Char C-9
Supp. Redundancy (Code 128) C-12
Supplementals (UPC-EAN) C-12
Supplements Separator B-26
Supplements 2 B-26
Supplements 5 B-26
Surface
Glossy B-3
Suspend Threshold tab 150
swap time (for battery) 29
T
target dot, duration of C-2
task
completed (marking as) 58
creating 56, 57
deleting 58
editing 57
notification 56
sorting 58
Task Manager 153
TCP_IP Settings (modem setup) 193
Teklogix Imager Applet B-1
Teklogix Imagers Settings 155
Teklogix Scanners Settings 156
Telepen B-32, C-32
Terminal Services Client
101
session, disconnecting (without ending)
101
session, ending 101
Text
Block Recognizer 73
entering 71
Letter Recognizer 75
soft keyboard entry 72
transcriber, using 72
title bar (navigation bar) 52
TLC-39 B-34, C-33
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
IX
Index
Today’s Screen (desktop screen) 51
appearance of 129
Items (to appear in screen) 130
Total Recall 162
backup profile, creating 163
backup profile, restoring 166
view profile 167
touch pen, using 51
touchscreen
calibrating 37
stylus, using 51
touch pen, using 51
touchscreen, aligning (calibrating) 37
Transcriber
Inking 123
quick settings 123
Transcriber, using 72
Transcriber (Input Methods tab) 123
Translations parameters (bar codes) 159
Transmit Check Digit C-22, C-24, C-25,
C-28, C-29, C-30, C-31
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) C-16
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
C-15
Transmit Code 1D Char C-5
Transmit Number System C-25
trigger mappings 142
Trigger Press Type, Manage Triggers
menu 144
Trioptic Code, Enable B-25
Trioptic Code 39, Enable C-6
troubleshooting tips (scanning) 226
TweakIT 169
U
Unicode Mapping 116
Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments) 112
UPC A B-27, C-11, C-25
UPC-A Check Digit C-11
UPC-A Preamble C-11
UPC E B-28, C-11, C-25
UPC-EAN C-12
UPC-EAN Shared Settings B-29, C-26
UPC-E Check Digit C-11
UPC-E Preamble C-11
UPC-E1 Check Digit C-11
UPC-E1 Preamble C-11
UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D C-13
X
USB-Ethernet adaptor cable (WA4010)
220
V
Version tab 131
Videos and Pictures 95
Vista 21
volume control 53
VPN connection, setting up 196
W
warnings 158
WiFi Config
Advanced tab 20
Authentication modes 15
Configuration tab 14
EAP Types 16
Encryption 17
IP address 19
Name Servers 19
Status tab 13
WiFi Config (configuring radio) 12
Wi-Fi Configuration 13
Windows Mobile 6, navigating in 51
WLAN connections, disabling 194
Word Completion tab 125
Word Mobile
data entry modes 87
Word See Pocket Word 86
1D internal scanner 225
2D Aztec B-36
2D Data Matrix B-36
2D Maxicode B-36
2D PDF-417 B-34
2D QR Code B-36
2D Raster Expand Rate C-5
2D UPC Half Block Stitching C-13
802.11b/g radio specifications 232
802.11 radio, configuring 12
NEO Hand-Held with Windows Mobile 6.1 Classic User Manual
">